Canon Camcorder PC980 User Manual

REVISION 0

PC860

PC940

F13-8436

F13-8491

TYA00001-

TZA00001-

UAA00001-

TVD00001-

TVE00001-

PC880

F13-8291

PC941

F13-8437

PC890

F13-8242

PC950

F13-8231

F13-8241

TVF00001-

PUF00001-

PUG00001-

PC920

F13-8431

TVB00001-

PUD00001-

PUE00001-

PUH00001-

F13-8441

PC960

F13-8434

TVG00001-

TVH00001-

TVJ00001-

F13-8461

PC980

F13-8232

PC921

F13-8432

TVC00001-

PC981

F13-8233

FY8-13GA-000

AUG. 1999

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

INTRODUCTION

This service manual has been prepared for the PC800/900 Series machines,

providing basic information used for servicing the machines in the field so as to ensure

their quality and performance.

This service manual consists of the following chapters:

Chapter 1 General Description introduces the machine's features, specifications,

names of parts, and how originals are reproduced.

Chapter 2 Basic Operation explains how copies are made on a step-by-step basis.

Chapter 3 Exposure System discusses the principles of operation used for the

machine's exposure system. It also explains the timing at which exposure-

related mechanisms are operated, and shows how they may be

disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 4 Image Formation System discusses the principles of operation used for the

machine's image formation system. It also explains the timing at which image

formation-related mechanisms are operated, and shows how they may be

disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 5 Pick-Up/Feeding System discusses the principles of operation used for the

machine's pickup/feeding system. It also explains the timing at which pickup/

feeding-related mechanisms are operated, and shows how they may be

disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 6 Fixing System discusses the principles of operation used for the machine's

fixing system. It also explains the timing at which fixing-related mechanisms

are operated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assembled and

adjusted.

Chapter 7 Externals/Auxiliary Mechanisms discusses the principles of operation used

for the machine's externals/auxiliary mechanisms. It also explains the timing

at which auxiliary mechanism-related mechanisms are operated, and shows

how they may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 8 ADF explains the principles of operation of the ADF in view of electrical and

mechanical functions and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows

how the unit may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 9 Installation introduces requirements for the site of installation, and shows

how the machine may be installed using step-by-step instructions.

Chapter 10 Maintenance and Servicing provides tables of periodically replaced parts and

consumables/durables and scheduled servicing charts.

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting provides tables of maintenance/inspection, standards/

adjustments, and problem identification (image fault/malfunction).

Appendix contains a general timing chart and general circuit diagrams.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the

relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing

of operation.

In the diagrams,

accompanies the symbol

nal.

represents the path of mechanical drive—where a signal name

, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric sig-

The expression “turn on the power” means flipping on the power switch, closing the

front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine

with power.

2. In the digital circuits, ‘1’ is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is

“High,” while ‘0’ is used to indicate “Low.” (The voltage value, however, differs from

circuit to circuit.)

In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked

in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines

are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC

controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.

The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for

product improvement or other reasons, and major changes will be communicated in the

form of Service Information bulletins.

All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this

Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and

isolate faults in the machine.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

• This service manual covers the models shown in the following table. Be sure to have a

good understanding of the difference from model to model before referring to this

manual.

Model

Type Multi- Single Zoom Default Density

ADF

Cassette

Copying

speed

code feeder feeder

ratio

correction

switch

standard

(cpm) at

Direct

(SW101)

PC860

PC880

PC890

PC920

PC921

PC940

PC941

PC950

PC960

PC980

PC981

TYA

TZA

UAA

PUD

PUE

PUH

TVB

TVC

TVD

TVE

PUF

PUG

TVF

TVG

TVH

TVJ

√

2R2E

3R1E

2R2E

3R1E

√

250 sheets

Universal

500 sheets

Universal

500 sheets

√

The notation “√” indicates that the item in question is available.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

iii

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

I. FEATURES ..................................1-1

IV. USING THE MACHINE ............. 1-15

A. Control Panel...................... 1-15

V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

BY THE USER .......................... 1-17

VI. IMAGE FORMATION ................ 1-20

A. Outline ................................ 1-20

II. SPECIFICATIONS .......................1-2

A. Copier....................................1-2

B. ADF .......................................1-8

III. NAMES OF PARTS................... 1-10

A. External View ..................... 1-10

B. Cross Section..................... 1-13

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

I. BASIC OPERATIONS ..................2-1

A. Functional Construction ........2-1

B. Outline of Electrical

D. Controlling the Main Motor

(M1) .......................................2-5

E. Inputs to and Outputs from

the DC Controller ..................2-7

Circuitry .................................2-2

C. Basic Sequence of

Operations.............................2-3

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I. OPERATIONS ..............................3-1

A. Outline ...................................3-1

B. Varying the Reproduction

A. Controlling the Scanning

Lamp .....................................3-9

III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 3-12

A. Scanner Drive Assembly.... 3-13

B. Lens Drive Assembly ......... 3-31

C. Exposure System ............... 3-37

Ratio ......................................3-2

C. Lens Drive System ................3-3

D. Scanner Drive System ..........3-4

II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM .................3-9

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

I. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM ...4-1

A. Outline ...................................4-1

B. Timing Chart for the Image

Formation System .................4-3

C. Controlling the Primary

F. Measuring the Density of

Originals ............................. 4-16

G. Controlling the Side Blanking

Mechanism ......................... 4-21

II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 4-22

A. Cartridge ............................ 4-23

B. Transfer Charging

Charging Roller Bias .............4-4

D. Controlling the Transfer

Roller Bias .............................4-8

E. Controlling the Developing/

Separation Static Eliminator

Assembly............................ 4-25

C. Blank Exposure .................. 4-26

Bias .................................... 4-11

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

I. PICKUP/FEEDING SYSTEM.......5-1

A. Outline ...................................5-1

B. Controlling the Pickup

Roller .....................................5-3

C. Controlling the Movement of

Paper .....................................5-9

D. Detecting Jams .................. 5-12

II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 5-18

A. Pickup Assembly ................ 5-19

B. Multifeeder Assembly ......... 5-28

C. Single-feeder Assembly ..... 5-31

D. Feeding Assembly.............. 5-33

E. Registration Roller

Assembly............................ 5-34

F. Delivery Assembly.............. 5-36

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

I. OPERATIONS ..............................6-1

A. Outline ...................................6-1

B. Controlling the Fixing

II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 6-10

A. Fixing Assembly ................. 6-11

Temperature ..........................6-3

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

I. FANS ............................................7-1

II. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM .........7-3

A. Outline of the Power Supply

System ..................................7-3

B. Power Supply Circuit .............7-4

C. Detecting an Error on

III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ........7-7

A. External Covers.....................7-8

B. Control Panel...................... 7-15

C. Copyboard Glass ............... 7-16

D. Main Motor/Main Drive

Assembly............................ 7-17

E. Electrical System ............... 7-21

the Composite Power Supply

PCB .......................................7-6

D. Protecting the Power Supply

Circuit ....................................7-6

CHAPTER 8 ADF

I. ADF ..............................................8-1

A. Outline ...................................8-1

H. Controlling the Belt Motor .. 8-15

I. Detecting Original Jams ..... 8-16

J. Power Supply ..................... 8-17

II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 8-18

A. Removing the ADF............. 8-19

B. External Covers.................. 8-21

C. Drive System ...................... 8-23

D. Feeding System ................. 8-26

E. Electrical System ............... 8-33

Basic Construction ................8-2

C. Basic Operations...................8-4

D. Detecting an Original ............8-6

E. Pickup Operation...................8-8

F. Delivery .............................. 8-12

G. Controlling the Pickup

Motor .................................. 8-14

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

I. SELECTING A SITE ....................9-1

II. UNPACKING AND

B. Placing Copy Paper...............9-9

III. MOVING THE MACHINE .......... 9-12

INSTALLATION ............................9-2

A. Unpacking and Installation....9-2

CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED

PARTS....................................... 10-1

II. DURABLES AND

CONSUMABLES ...................... 10-1

III. SCHEDULED SERVICING ....... 10-1

IV. STORING AND HANDLING

THE CARTRIDGE..................... 10-2

A. Storing the Cartridge with the

Packaging Seal Intact ........ 10-2

B. Storing and Handling the

Cartridge with the Packaging

Seal Removed.................... 10-3

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

vii

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

I. MAINTENANCE AND

A. Troubleshooting

INSPECTION ............................ 11-3

A. Image Adjustment Basic

Procedure........................... 11-3

B. Points to Note for

Malfunctions ..................... 11-61

V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING

PROBLEMS ............................ 11-75

A. Copy Paper Jam............... 11-75

B. Faulty Feeding.................. 11-78

VI. ARRANGEMENT AND

Servicing ............................ 11-4

II. STANDARDS AND

ADJUSTMENTS ....................... 11-5

A. Mechanical ......................... 11-5

B. ADF .................................. 11-30

C. Electrical........................... 11-41

III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE

FAULTS ................................... 11-48

A. Making Initial Checks ....... 11-48

B. Sample Image Faults ....... 11-52

C. Troubleshooting Image

FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL

PARTS..................................... 11-79

A. Sensors and Solenoids .... 11-79

B. Switches ........................... 11-80

C. Lamp, Heater, Motor, Etc. 11-81

D. PCBs ................................ 11-82

E. ADF .................................. 11-83

F. Variable Resistors (VR) and

Check Pins by PCB .......... 11-84

VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS .................. 11-86

Faults................................ 11-53

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING

MALFUNCTIONS.................... 11-61

APPENDIX

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ........ A-1

B. SIGNALS AND

ABBREVIATIONS ....................... A-3

C. GENERAL CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ................................... A-5

D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ................................... A-7

E. ADF CONTROLLER CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ................................. A-15

F. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................. A-19

G. CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ................................. A-27

H. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT

I. SENSOR CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ................................. A-30

J. NOISE FILTER CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ................................. A-31

K. HIGH VOLTAGE CONTACT

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................. A-32

L. BLANK EXPOSURE (front)

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................. A-33

M. BLANK EXPOSURE (rear)

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................. A-34

N. SPECIAL TOOLS ...................... A-35

O. SOLVENTS/OILS ...................... A-36

DIAGRAM ................................. A-29

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

viii

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter provides specifications of the machine, instructions on how to operate

the machine, and an outline of copying process.

I. FEATURES ..................................1-1

II. SPECIFICATIONS .......................1-2

A. Copier....................................1-2

B. ADF .......................................1-8

III. NAMES OF PARTS................... 1-10

A. External View ..................... 1-10

B. Cross Section..................... 1-13

IV. USING THE MACHINE ............. 1-15

A. Control Panel...................... 1-15

V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

BY THE USER .......................... 1-17

VI. IMAGE FORMATION ................ 1-20

A. Outline ................................ 1-20

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

I. FEATURES

1. Personal Copier with a Zoom Function and a Fixed Copyboard

• You can choose either a default enlargement/reduction ratio or any ratio between 70% and

141% in 1% increments.

2. Ecology-Conscious

• The use of a roller charging method has resulted in a considerable reduction of ozone: 0.01

ppm or less on the average, 0.02 ppm or less at maximum (1/100 to 1/1000 compared with

existing Canon machines).

3. SURF Fixing Assembly

• The wait time is 0 sec (at 20°C room temperature), enabling speedy copying work immedi-

ately after power-on.

4. Various Paper Sizes

• The paper may be between A4 (LGL) and A5 (STMT) (*Using the universal cassette).

• In manual feed mode, paper may be as large as A4 (LGL) or as small as a business card.

5. All-in-One Cartridge for Simple Maintenance

• The photosensitive drum, toner case, charging roller, developing assembly, and cleaning as-

sembly are constructed as a single entity (cartridge).

The user may expect quality copy images at all times as long as he/she performs simple

replacement/cleaning work.

6. Large Paper Source

• The source of paper may contain as many as 550 sheets of paper (500-sheet cassette +

multifeeder; multifeeder type).

7. Separate top unit

• The machine’s top unit may be opened to make jam removal easy.

8. ADF Type

• Continuous copying is possible with the use of the ADF.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-1

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

II. SPECIFICATIONS

A. Copier

1. Type

Item

Descriptions

Body

Desk top

Fixed

Copyboard

Source of light

Halogen lamp (80 V/110 W for 120V-model; 150 V/160 W

for 220/240 V-model)

Lens

Fixed focal point lens

OPC drum (24-mm dia.)

Table 1-201

Photosensitive medium

2. Mechanisms

Item

Descriptions

Reproduction

Indirect static reproduction

Charging

Roller (direct charging)

Slit (moving light source)

Auto or manual

Exposure

Copy density adjustment

Development

Pickup

Dry (toner projection)

Cassette (1 pc.)

Single-feeder (single-feeder type)

Multifeeder (multifeeder type)

Separation

Fixing

Curvature separation + static eliminator

Flat heater

Cleaning

Blade

Original orientation

Center reference (copyboard)

Table 1-202

1-2

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. Performance

Item

Descriptions

Original type

Sheet, book, 3-D object (2kg max.)

Maximum original size

Reproduction ratio

Zoom

A4 (297 × 210 mm)/LGL (216 × 356 mm)

Inch/AB-configuration: 2R2E Inch-configuration: 3R1E

70% to 141% (in 1% increments^*1)

Wait time

0 sec (at 20°C room temperature)

First copy time

10 sec or less (at 20°C room temperature; Direct, non-AE,

from the cassette)

Continuous copying

Copy size

100 (max.)

A4/LGL (297 × 210 mm/216 × 356 mm max.)

Business card (90 × 55 mm, min.)

Copy paper type

Cassette:

Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m²), tracing paper (SM-1, A4R/

B5R), colored paper, recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m²; A4R/

B5R), eco paper (80 g/m²; A4R)

Manual Feeder:

Plain paper (52 to 128 g/m²), tracing paper (SM-1, GNT-

80^*2; A4R/B5R), transparency^*2,*4(A4R/LTRR^*3), colored

paper, business card (200 g/m²or less), label sheet^*2(A4R/

LTRR), recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m²; A4R/B5R), eco pa-

per (80 g/m²; A4R), postcard^*3

Double-Sided/Overlay Copying^*5:

Plain paper (64 to 128 g/m²), colored paper, business card

(200 g/m²or less), recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m²; A4R/

B5R), eco paper (80 g/m²; A4R), postcard^*3

Cassette

With claws

Universal cassette (250 sheets of 80 g/m²paper; A4/LGL to

A5/STMT)

250-sheet cassette (250 sheets of 80 g/m²)

500-sheet cassette (500 sheets of 80 g/m²)

5 mm deep (approx.; 50 sheets of 80 g/m²)

100 sheets (A4; 80 g/m²)

Multifeeder tray

Copy tray

Non-image width

Leading edge: 2.0 ±1.5 mm (Direct; 4.0 mm or less otherwise)

Left/right: 0.0 +2.0, -0.0 mm (0 +4.0, -0.0 mm for LTR)

Provided (5 min, approx.; fixed)^*6

Auto power-off

Table 1-203

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-3

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

*1. Applies only to models with a zoom function.

*2. Applies only to single pickup if the multifeeder is used.

*3. Applies only to vertical feeding.

*4. Upon delivery, be sure to remove each from the copy tray.

*5. Be sure to remove any curling before feeding for a second time.

*6. If stopped because paper ran out during copying operation, 1 hr.

1-4

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

4. Others

Item

Descriptions

Operating condition

Temperature

7.5°C to 32.5°C/44.5°F to 90.5°F

Humidity

5% to 85% RH

Atmospheric pressure

607.95 to 1013.25 hPa (0.6 to 1 atm)

Power source

Serial number

120 V 60 Hz 220/240 V 50 Hz, 60 Hz

TVBxxxxx PUDxxxxx PUHxxxxx

TVCxxxxx PUExxxxx

TVDxxxxx PUFxxxxx

TVExxxxx PUGxxxxx

TVFxxxxx

TYAxxxxx

TVGxxxxx TZAxxxxx

TVHxxxxx UAAxxxxx

TVJxxxxx

Maximum power consumption

Noise

0.9 kW or less

Standby: 1.2W (approx.; about 5min; reference only)

Copying: 0.4kWh (approx.; reference only)

Standby: -(sound power level by ISO)

Copying: (sound power level by ISO)

• Single-feeder type: 68 dB or less

• Multifeeder type: 66 dB or less

Ozone

0.01 ppm or less (average; 0.02 ppm or less, max.)

Dimensions (WxDxH)

Copyboard Type

484.9 × 448.2 × 297.5 mm^*1/ 329.0 mm^*2

19.1 in. × 17.6 in × 11.7 in^*1/ 13.0 in^*2

ADF Type

484.9 × 448.2 × 358.3 mm^*1/ 389.8 mm^*2

19.1 in × 17.6 in × 14.1 in^*1/ 15.3 in^*2

Weight (including the cassette)

Copyboard Type

Single-feeder type: 19.3 kg^*1/ 42.5 lb^*1, 20.9 kg^*2/ 46.0 lb^*2

Multifeeder type: 19.5 kg^*1/ 42.9 lb^*1, 21.1 kg^*2/ 46.4 lb^*2

ADF Type

Single-feeder type: 23.8 kg^*1/ 52.4 lb^*1, 25.2 kg^*2/ 55.4 lb^*2

Multifeeder type: 24.0 kg^*1/ 52.8 lb^*1, 25.4 kg^*2/ 55.9 lb^*2

Consumables

Copy paper: Keep wrapped, and protect against humidity.

Toner: Avoid direct sunlight, and store at 40°C/104°F, 85%

or less.

Table 1-204

*1. 250-sheet cassette type

*2. 500-sheet cassette type

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-5

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. Default Ratios

Item

2R2E (Inch/AB-configuration)

3R1E (Inch-configuration)

Direct

1:1.000

Reduce I

Reduce II

Reduce III

Reduce IV

Enlarge I

Enlarge II

1:0.707

1:0.786

1:0816

1:0.860

1:1.414

1:1.154

1:1.414

Table 1-205

1-6

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

6. Copying Speed

Copying speed

at Direct

Reproduction ratio

Copy size

Number of copies

( Multifeeder^*1)

(Copies / min)

13 (9)

Direct

LTRR

LGL

STMTR

MIN

11 (8)

13 (9)

10 (9)

12 (9)

10 (9)

Reduce I (70.7%)

Reduce II (78.6%)

Reduce IV (86.0%)

Enlarge II (141.4%)

Direct

LGL → LTRR

MARJIN

MAX

A4R

B5R

A5R

Reduce I (70.7%)

Reduce III (81.6%)

Enlarge I (115.4%)

Enlarge II (141.4%)

Direct

A4R → A5R

B5R → A5R

B5R → A4R

A5R→ A4R

A4R

B5R

A5R

Reduce I (70.7%)

Reduce III (81.6%)

Enlarge I (115.4%)

Enlarge II (141.4%)

Direct

A4R → A5R

B5R → A5R

B5R → A4R

A5R → A4R

LTRR

10 (9)

10 m(9)

10 (9)

LGL

STMTR

MIN

LGL → LTRR

MARJIN

MAX

10 (9)

Reduce I (70.7%)

Reduce II (78.6%)

Reduce III (86.0%)

Enlarge II (141.4%)

Table 1-206

*1. The number of copies starting with the pickup operation that follows the delivery of the

19th copy in a continuous copying job. (See p.5-8)

The specifications are subject to change for product improvement.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-7

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

B. ADF

Item

Descriptions

Original pickup

Auto pickup/delivery

Face-down

Original orientation

Original position

Original separation

Original type

Center reference

Top separation

Single-sided (50 to 128 g/m²)

A5 (STMT) to A4R (LTRR), LGL

Length: 139.7 to 355.6 mm (feeding direction)

Width: 139.7 to 215.9 mm

Stack

30 sheets (80 g/m²or less; about 3 mm in height)

Original processing mode

Original size detection

Mixed original sizes

Original detection

Original feeding speed

Communication with host

Dimensions

Single-sided original to single-sided copy

Yes (in feeding direction)

Yes

446 mm/sec

IPC

Width: 474 mm/ 18.7 in.

(659 mm/ 25.9 in. with the tray open)

Depth: 394 mm/ 15.5 in.

Height: 74 mm/ 2.9 in. (216 mm/ 8.5 in. with the tray open)

Weight

5 kg/ 11 lb (approx.)

Power source

24 VDC and 5 VDC (from the host)

40 W or less

Maximum power consumption

Operating environment

Temperature: same as the host

Humidity:

same as the host

Table 1-207

1-8

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

*1. The following may not be used as an original:

• Sheet with a staple, clip, or glue.

• Sheet with a cut, hole, or tear.

• Sheet with holes for binding.

• Sheet with a carbon back.

• Sheet with a cut-and-paste piece.

• Sheet with curling, bending, or wrinkling.

The specifications are subject to change for product improvement.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-9

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

III. NAMES OF PARTS

A. External View

[1]

1. Copyboard Type

[2]

[6]

[3]

[5]

[4]

[1] Copyboard cover

[2] Static eliminator cleaner

[3] Manual feed tray

[4] Right door

[5] Cassette

[6] Copyboard glass

Figure 1-301

[4]

[3]

[5]

[2]

[1]

[6]

[1] Copy tray

[4] Static eliminator

[2] Power cord connector

[3] Open/close lever

[5] Copy density correction switch

[6] Delivery guide plate

Figure 1-302

1-10

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2. ADF Type

[1]

[5]

[2]

[4]

[3]

[1] ADF

[4] Cassette

[2] Manual feed tray

[3] Right door

[5] Copyboard glass

Figure 1-303

[6]

[5]

[7]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[1] Static eliminator cleaner

[2] Delivery guide plate

[3] Copy tray

[5] Open/close lever

[6] Static eliminator

[7] Copy density correction switch

[4] Power cord connector

Figure 1-304

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. ADF

[3]

[4]

[2]

[1]

[1] Original tray

[3] Slide guide

[2] Original delivery tray

[4] Auxiliary tray

Figure 1-305

1-12

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

B. Cross Section

1. Body

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

[6]

[7]

[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]

[14]

[28] [27] [26] [25] [24]

[23] [22] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15]

[29]

[1] No. 3 mirror

[11] Cartridge

[21] Transfer roller

[22] Feed belt

[23] Cassette

[24] Fixing upper unit

[25] Fixing lower roller

[2] No. 2 mirror

[3] No. 1 mirror

[4] Scanning lamp

[5] Heat exhaust fan

[6] Copyboard glass

[7] Side blanking lamp

[8] Lens

[12] No. 4 mirror

[13] No. 5 mirror

[14] Multifeeder tray

[15] Vertical path roller

[16] Multifeeder pickup roller [26] Cleaning roller

[17] Cassette pickup roller

[18] Registration roller

[27] Delivery roller

[28] Copy tray

[9] Primary charging roller [19] Developing cylinder

[29] Single-feeder pickup roller

[10] No. 6 mirror

[20] Photosensitive drum

Figure 1-306

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-13

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2. ADF

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[13]

[12]

[11]

[10] [9] [8] [7]

[1] Delivery roller

[2] Copy tray

[8] Separation pad

[9] Registration roller

[3] Pickup roller 2

[4] Pickup roller 1

[5] Copyboard tray

[6] Auxiliary tray

[7] Guide plate

[10] Feed belt drive roller

[11] Feed belt

[12] Feed belt roller

[13] Feed belt link slave roller

Figure 1-307

1-14

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

IV. USING THE MACHINE

A. Control Panel

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4] [5] [6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[15]

[14]

[13]

[12] [11]

[10]

Figure 1-401

No.

Name

Copy density adjusting lever

Description

Adjusts the density of copies

manually.

Remarks

Copy density mode indicator

Default ratio indicator

Indicates the selected copy den-

sity mode.

Indicates the selected default ra-

tio.

Paper selection indicator^*1

Indicates the selected cassette/

manual feed tray.If there is no

paper loaded, it flashes.

Jam indicator

Flashes in response to a jam.

Count/ratio indicator

• Indicates the number of copies 100 (max.; continuous

or reproduction ratio.

• The symbol “%” turns on

when indicating a ratio.

copying)

Clear/stop key

Stops copying or returns copy-

ing mode to standard mode.

Standard Mode

Ratio: 100%

Count: 1

Paper source: cassette

Copy density: auto

mode

Copy start key

Power switch

Starts copying.

Turns on and off the power.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-15

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

No.

Name

Count/zoom set key

Description

Sets the number of copies or a

zoom ratio.

Remarks

Zoom indicator^*2

Zoom key^*2

Turns on when zoom mode is

selected.

Selects/deselects zoom mode.

May be between 70%

and 141% in 1% incre-

ments.

Paper selection key^*1

Default ratio key

Selects the cassette/ manual

feed tray.

Selects a default reproduction

ratio.

Copy density mode selection

key

Selects copying density mode.

Table 1-401

*1. Applies only to a multifeeder model.

*2. Applies only to a model equipped with a zoom function.

1-16

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER

Instruct the user to clean the following if images tend to be soiled or copy paper tends to jam

often.

1. Soiled Images

a. Copyboard Glass/Copyboard Cover

Clean the cover with a moist cloth (with water or mild detergent solution); then, dry wipe it.

b. Feeding Belt (ADF type)

b.1 Cleaning in Feeder Cleaning Mode

1) Turn on the machine, and hold down the Copy Density Mode Selection key for 4 sec or

more.

• The count/ratio indicator will indicate ‘U6’.

Zoom

Figure 1-501

2) Place about 10 sheets of blank copy paper (A4/LTR) on the original tray of the ADF.

3) Press the Copy Start key.

• Copy paper will be fed from the original tray.

• The indicator flashes ‘U6’ while the feeder is being cleaned.

4) Press the Copy Density Mode Selection key to end the mode.

Caution:

• You cannot start feeder cleaning mode while the machine is making copies or if an error

exists.

• The auto power-off mechanism does not operate while feeder cleaning mode is being

executed.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-17

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

b.2 Cleaning by Hand

1) Wipe the feed belt with a moist cloth (water or mild detergent solution) in the direction of

the arrow in the figure; then, dry wipe it.

Figure 1-502

2. If Jams Occur Frequently

a. Static Eliminator

1) Remove the static eliminator cleaner from the machine.

Figure 1-503 (Copyboard type)

1-18

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Figure 1-504 (ADF type)

2) Pull the open/close lever to open the machine.

3) Using the static eliminator cleaner, clean the static eliminator.

• Brush out the paper lint or the like from the groove of the static eliminator.

Figure 1-505

4) Close the machine as soon as you have finished cleaning. (Work briskly.)

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-19

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

VI. IMAGE FORMATION

A. Outline

The construction of the machine is as follows:

Copyboard glass

Scanning lamp

Fixed focal point lens

Side blanking lamp

(front, rear)

Primary charging roller

Developing blade

Cleaning blade

Developing cylinder

Fixing assembly

Photosensitive drum

Transfer charging roller

Static eliminator

Figure 1-601

1-20

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The machine’s image formation process consists of the following seven steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Step 7

Primary charging (AC + negative DC)

Image exposure

Development (AC + negative DC)

Transfer (negative DC)

Separation (curvature separation + static eliminator; positive DC)

Fixing

Drum cleaning

Static latent image formation block

1. Primary charging

7. Drum cleaning

2. Image exposure

3. Development

4. Transfer

Manual feed

Registration

6. Fixing

5. Separation

Delivery

Cassette

: Flow of copy paper

: Rotation of the photosensitive drum

Figure 1-602

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-21

CHAPTER 2

BASIC OPERATION

This chapter provides descriptions on basic operations, functions of each operation,

relationships between electrical and mechanical systems, and timing at which each

associated part is turned on.

Process speed

96 mm/sec

I. BASIC OPERATIONS ..................2-1

A. Functional Construction ........2-1

B. Outline of Electrical

D. Controlling the Main Motor

(M1) .......................................2-5

E. Inputs to and Outputs from

the DC Controller ..................2-7

Circuitry .................................2-2

C. Basic Sequence of

Operations.............................2-3

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

I. BASIC OPERATIONS

A. Functional Construction

The machine consists of four functional blocks: pickup/feeding system, exposure system, im-

age formation system, and control system.

Control system

Control panel

Exposure system

Copyboard

Original

illuminating block

Control circuit

Optical block

Image formation

system

Primary charging

roller

Photosensitive

drum

Drum

cleaning block

Developing

assembly

Transfer/

separation

Pickup

control block

Feeding

Copy tray

Fixing assembly/

delivery assembly

Pickup/

feeding system

Cassette

Figure 2-101

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-1

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

B. Outline of Electrical Circuitry

The machine’s major electric mechanisms are controlled by the microprocessor mounted on

the DC controller PCB, which reads input signals from sensors and operating keys according to the

instructions of the program stored in advance and sends signals used to drive motors, solenoids,

lamps, and other loads as needed.

Sensor

<Loads>

Composite

DC controller PCB

power supply PCB

Scanning lamp

Fixing heater

Q900

CPU

Q101

CPU

+5V

• Scanner home position detection

• Lens home position detection

• Pre-registration roller paper

detection

+24V

• Delivery paper detection

• Vertical path roller paper detection

• Single-feeder paper detection

• Primary charging roller

High-

voltage

circuit

block

• Developing cylinder

• Transfer charging roller

• Static eliminator

Contact

PCB

AE sensor

PCB

Main motor

driver PCB

Main

motor

Thermistor

• Pickup clutch solenoid

• Registration clutch solenoid

• Lens solenoid

• Scanner thermistor

• Fixing thermistor

Solenoid

• Multifeeder pickup solenoid

• Cassette pickup solenoid

Control

panel

Side blanking

lamp

Scanner/

lens drive motor

Power

switch

Scanner cooling fan

Sensor/

switch

ADF

ADF load

Figure 2-102

2-2

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

C. Basic Sequence of Operations

• A4R, Direct, 2 Copies, Continuous, Cassette

Power switch Copy Start key

ON ON

STBY INTR AER

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV LSTR STBY

0.3sec (approx.)

Main motor (M1)

Scanning lamp (LA1)

Scanner

Forward Reverse

I II

Primary AC bias

Primary DC bias

Developing AC bias

Developing DC bias

Transfer bias

Static eliminator bias

Fixing heater (H1)

I : Scanner home position detection

II: Lens home position detection

Figure 2-103

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-3

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

Period

Description

STBY

(standby)

• From when he power switch is turned Waits until the Copy Start key is

on to when the Copy Start key is pressed.

pressed.

• From when LSTR ends to when the

Copy Start key is pressed.

INTR

(initial rotation)

From when the Copy Start key is Removes residual charges from the

pressed to when the scanner moves for- photosensitive drum, thereby ensuring

ward.

a stable drum sensitivity.

AER

(AE rotation)

While the scanner moves forward about Measures the density of the original.

10 cm and then moves it in reverse.

SCFW

While the scanner is moving forward.

Illuminates the original by the scanning

(scanner forward)

• The distance varies according to the lamp, and the reflected optical image is

selected copy size and reproduction projected to the photosensitive drum

ratio.

through mirrors and lenses.

• The forward speed varies according to

the selected reproduction ratio.

SCRV

(scanner reverse)

While the scanner is moving in reverse. Moves the scanner to the home position

• The reverse speed is about 3.3 as fast in preparation for the next copying run.

as the forward speed used in Direct.

Neutralizes the drum surface potential

LSTR

(last rotation)

From when SCRV ends to when the as post-processing.

main motor stops.

Table 2-101

2-4

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

D. Controlling the Main Motor (M1)

1. Outline

Table 2-102 shows the functions of the main motor control circuit, and Figure 2-104 is a block

diagram of the circuit.

Item

Power supply

Description

24 VDC from the composite power supply.

Drive signal

Signal (MMD) from the DC controller PCB.

Moving/drive parts

Photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing assembly,

transfer charging roller, pickup roller, vertical roller, registration roller,

feeding assembly, fixing assembly, delivery roller, heat exhaust fan

Control

Executes on/off control.

Executes constant speed rotation control.

Error detection

Issues ‘E010’.

Table 2-102

+24V

J205

-4

J901

24V -1

Clock pulse

generator

Phase

control

drive

controller

PCB

Drive

current

-3

-2

GND -2

MMD -3

Main motor

(M1)

circuit

J203

-3

J103

-6

J104 J204

Hall IC output

MMCLK

-1

-7

-1 MLOCK -4

Composite

power

supply

PCB

Reference signal

Main motor drive PCB

Figure 2-104

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-5

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2. Operations

The main motor (M1) is a DC motor with a built-in clock pulse generator, which generates

clock pulses (MMCLK) in relation to the rotation of the motor while the motor is rotating.

The speed control circuit controls the main motor (M1) so that it rotates at a specific speed by

matching the frequency of these clock pulses and that of the reference signals.

When the main motor drive signal (MMD) from the DC controller circuit goes ‘1’, the motor

diver drive circuit turns on, causing the main motor (M1) to rotate at a specific speed.

While the main motor is rotating at a specific speed, the main motor driver PCB keeps sending

the constant speed state signal (MLOCK=0) to the DC controller PCB. If the rotation of the motor

starts to have fluctuations, the MLOCK signal goes ‘1’.

Related Error Code

E010

While the main motor drive signal is generated, the rotation of the main motor deviates from

a specific number for 1 sec or more.

a. Turning On/Off the Main Motor

When the main motor drive signal (MMD) from the DC controller circuit goes ‘1’, the main motor

driver turns on to rotate the main motor (M1).

b. Rotating the Main Motor at a Constant Speed

The drive circuit on the motor driver PCB controls the main motor so that the phase of the fre-

quency of the clock pulse signals (MMCLK) occurring when the motor rotates and that of the

frequency of the reference signals match. The main motor driver PCB sends the constant speed

state signal (MLOCK=0) to the DC controller circuit.

c. Detecting an Error (E010)

If the rotation of the main motor starts to have fluctuations for some reason, the MLOCK signal

goes ‘1’. If the signal remains ‘1’ for about 1 sec, the DC controller will find the condition to be a

fault in the main motor, and will stop the main motor and, at the same time, indicate ‘E010’ in the

display.

2-6

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

E. Inputs to and Outputs from the DC Controller

1. Inputs to the DC Control (1/2)

DC controller PCB

+5V

J101-1

Scanner home

position sensor

When the scanner is in the home position, ‘1’.

(The light-blocking plate is at PS1, ‘1’.)

-3

-2

SCHP

PS1

PS2

PS3

PS4

+5V

LHP

J109-11

Lens home

position sensor

When the lens is in the home position, ‘1’.

(The light-blocking plate is at PS2, ‘1’.)

-10

-9

J62

J102-7

DIG3

DPD

When PS3 has detected paper, ‘0’.

(The light-blocking plate is at PS3, ‘1’.)

-9

-8

Delivery sensor

+5V

J132-3

Vertical path roller

paper sensor

When PS4 has detected paper, ‘1’.

(The light-blocking plate is at PS4, ‘1’.)

-5

-4

PDP

J113-1

DIG2

SFPD

Single-feeder

When PS5 has detected paper, ‘0’.

-3

-2

paper sensor

(Single-feeder type only)

(The light-blocking plate is at PS5, ‘1’.)

PS5

+5V

J108-4

When Q751 has detected paper, ‘1’.

(The light-blocking plate is at PS751, ‘0’.)

Pre-registration

roller paper sensor

-3

-5

RPD

Q751

Sensor PCB

J433 J62

TH1

TH2

J102-1

-6

When the surface temperature of the fixing

heater increases, the voltage decreases.

(analog signal)

TH1

TH2

Fixing thermistor

J131-1

-2

When the temperature of the scanner increases,

the voltage decreases. (analog signal)

Scanner thermistor

Figure 2-105

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-7

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2. Inputs to the DC Controller (2/2)

DC controller PCB

+24V

J601

J107-4

+24V

-3

-2

-1

AEREF

When the light reflected by the original increases,

the voltage increases.

AE sensor PCB

The keys and the LEDs are wired in a matrix

in the control panel PCB, and the DC controller

turns on or flashes the LEDs and reads key inputs.

J301 J111

J111-15

Control panel

PCB

PWOFF

J111-16

SW309

J62

J102-2

DIG1

HEAT0

The variation in the resistance of the fixing heater

is corrected in three levels based on combinations

of 2-bit signals.

-3

-4

-5

DIG1

HEAT1

Figure 2-106

2-8

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

3. Outputs from the DC Controller (1/2)

Composite power supply PCB

DC controller PCB

Line filter

J201-2

LF1

NF1

(220/240V model only)

-1

DS1

Noise filter

Door switch

Fixing heater

J16

J434

Transformer

J207-1

-2

FU2

Thermal fuse 2

J104-2

Fixing heater

activation circuit

HEAT_TRG When ‘0’,

the fixing heater

turns on.

Scanning lamp

LA1

J910-3

-1

FU1

Scanning lamp

activation circuit

Thermal fuse 1

Primary charging roller

Developing cylinder

Transfer charging roller

Static eliminator

High-

Micro-

processor

voltage

circuit

block

Communication with

the composite power

supply

HVT board

+24V

J103-6

J104-1

MMD

See p. 2-5.

MLOCK

Main

motor

Main motor

driver PCB

See p. 3-7.

Scanner/

lens drive motor

Figure 2-107

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-9

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

4. Outputs from the DC Control PCB (2/2)

DC controller PCB

+24V

J53 J51

J109-4

When ‘0’, the pickup clutch solenoid

turns on.

SL1

Pickup clutch solenoid

-3

PUSLD*

+24V

J54

J109-6

-5

When ‘0’, the registration clutch

solenoid turns on.

Registration clutch solenoid

SL2

SL3

SL4

RGSLD*

+24V

J52

J109-2

-1

When ‘0’, the lens solenoid turns on.

Lens solenoid

LNSLD*

+24V

J55 J51

J109-8

-7

When ‘0’, the multifeeder pickup

solenoid turns on.

Multifeeder pickup solenoid

(Multifeeder type only)

MFSLD*

+24V

J58

J132-2

-1

When ‘0’, the cassette pickup solenoid

turns on.

Cassette pickup solenoid

Scanner cooling fan

SL5

CPUSD*

+24V

J130-1

-2

When ‘0’, the scanner cooling fan

turns on.

FM1

FM1D*

J106-1

SB_LP*

Side blanking lamp (rear)

Side blanking lamp (front)

When ‘0’, the blanking lamp turns on.

+24V

-2

Figure 2-108

2-10

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

5. Inputs to and Outputs from the ADF

DC controller PCB

J60

-8

-7

-6

-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

J114-1

REQ

ACK

TXD

RXD

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

To the ADF

See Chapter 8.

J24

-4

-3

-2

-1

To the ADF

J202-1

-2

J105-6

-5

+24V

+5V

-3

-4

-3

+5V

-5

-2

-6

-1

+24V

Composite power supply PCB

Figure 2-109

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-11

CHAPTER 3

EXPOSURE SYSTEM

This chapter discusses the principles of operation used for the machine's lens drive

unit and scanner drive unit. It also explains the timing at which these drive units are

operated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assmbled and adjusted.

I. OPERATIONS ..............................3-1

A. Outline ...................................3-1

B. Varying the Reproduction

A. Controlling the Scanning

Lamp .....................................3-9

III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 3-12

A. Scanner Drive Assembly.... 3-13

B. Lens Drive Assembly ......... 3-31

C. Exposure System ............... 3-37

Ratio ......................................3-2

C. Lens Drive System ................3-3

D. Scanner Drive System ..........3-4

II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM .................3-9

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I. OPERATIONS

A. Outline

Table 3-101 shows the major functions of the exposure system.

Item

Description

Lamp

Halogen

Scanning

By moving the No. 1 mirror mount

Scanner position detection

Ratio variation

By a sensor (scanner home position sensor; PS1)

Main scanning direction:by varying the optical length

Sub scanning direction:by varying the speed of the No. 1 mirror mount

Lens drive control

Scanner/lens drive motor (M2)

Fixed focal point lens unit

Mobile No. 4/5 mirror unit

Scanner drive control

Protective function

Scanner/lens drive motor (M2)

Scanner thermistor (TH2)

By a fuse (blows in response to overheating of the scanning lamp to cut

power to the lamp)

• Thermal fuse (FU1; blows at 128°C)

Table 3-101

Copyboard glass

Moves for enlargement/

Enlarge Reduce

reduction

Fixed focal point lens

No. 4/5 mirror unit

Photosensitive

drum

Figure 3-101

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-1

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

B. Varying the Reproduction Ratio

The reproduction ratio in the drum axial direction (main scanning direction) is varied by the

lens drive system, and that in the drum peripheral direction (sub scanning direction) is changed by

the scanner drive system.

In the lens drive system, the positions of the fixed focal point lens and the No. 4/5 mirror are

changed to vary the reproduction ratio.

In the scanner system, the relative speed of the No. 1 mirror mount is made higher (for reduc-

tion) or lower (for enlargement) than the drum peripheral speed.

Direct

Optical length

Reduction

Optical length

Enlargement

Optical length

Optical length: L1 < L2, L1 < L3

Figure 3-102

3-2

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

C. Lens Drive System

1. Outline

The lens drive system is driven by the scanner/lens drive motor (M2). When the lens solenoid

(SL3) turns on, the switching gear is pushed in the direction of . In this condition, when the

scanner/lens drive motor rotates in reverse direction ( ), the lens unit will move in the direction of

reduction ( ) by the work of the gear and the lens cable.

At the same time, the No. 4/5 mirror unit operates according to the distance over which the lens

unit is moved by the work of the gear and the cam, thereby varying the optical length.

At this time, the blanking lamp also moves in conjunction with the lens to blank out the appro-

priate front/rear widths to suit the selected reduction ratio.

SL3

OFF

Switching

gear

Switching

gear

While the scanner is moving

Top View

While the lens is moving

Cam

Switching gear

SL3

Scanner/lens drive motor

(M2)

No. 4/5 mirror unit

Lens cable

Reduction

Enlargement

Lens unit

Lens home position

sensor (PS2)

Lens shift detecting shaft

for side blanking lamp

DC controller PCB

Figure 3-103

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-3

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

D. Scanner Drive System

1. Outline

The scanner is driven by the scanner/lens drive motor (M2), whose direction of rotation

changes to move the scanner forward or in reverse.

When moving the scanner forward, the speed of rotation of the motor varies according to the

selected reproduction ratio on a continuous basis; when moving the scanner in reverse, on the other

hand, its speed remains the same regardless of the selected reproduction ratio in normal copying

(312mm/sec, about 3.3 as fast as when moving the scanner forward in Direct).

The distance over which the scanner is moved varies according to the length of copy paper and

the selected reproduction ratio.

The scanner/lens drive motor dives the lens drive system as well as the scanner.

PS1 Light-blocking

plate

Scanner home position signal (SCHP)

Scanner home position sensor (PS1)

Q109

Motor driver circuit

DC controller PCB

Figure 3-104

3-4

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

2. Relationship between Scanner Sensor and Signal

Scanner

Forward Reverse

Scanner sensor

Signal

Description

PS1(scanner

home position

sensor)

• Provides a means of reference for

determining forward movement

distance.

• Stops the scanner moving in re-

verse in 0.1 sec.

SCHP

Table 3-102

3. Basic Sequence of Operations (scanner)

Power switch

Copy Start key

STBY

INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV LSTR STBY

Scanner home position

sensor (PS1)

Pre-registration roller

paper sensor (Q751)

Forward

Reverse

Scanner

Scanning lamp(LA1)

I : Scanner home position detection

II: Lens home position detection

Figure 3-105

The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB controls the forward movement distance of the

scanner with reference to the falling edge of the scanner home position signal. The forward move-

ment distance of the scanner varies according to the length of copy paper and reproduction ratio. If

the ratio is less than 130%, the scanner is moved forward as if for A4 (297 mm); if it is 130% or

more, the scanner is moved forward as if for LTR (279 mm).

For descriptions on how length is detected, see p. 5-10.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-5

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

4. Controlling the Copying Speed

The machine uses a halogen lamp for scanning, and the heat of the lamp increases the tempera-

ture of the copyboard.

To prevent possible overheating of the copyboard glass, the temperature of the scanner is

monitored by a thermistor (TH2); if its reading reaches 37.5°C or higher, the copying speed is

reduced to 6 cpm.

If this mechanism turns on during continuous copying, it remains on until the end of the copy-

ing job.

At the end of copying, if the reading of the thermistor is 34.5°C or higher, the No. 1 mirror

mount is moved forward 105 mm from the home position and stopped, thereby lowering the tem-

perature of the copyboard fast.

Reference:

While the copying speed is controlled to 6 cpm, the speed of the reverse movement of the

scanner is reduced to prevent overheating of the copyboard glass. (about 75 mm/sec)

Switching to 6-cpm copying speed

SCRV SCFW SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV LSTRSTBY

37.5˚C or higher

34.5˚C or higher

Check timing by thermistor

(TH2)

Main motor (M1)

Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)

Registration clutch

solenoid (SL2)

Scanner

I : When the pre-registration roller paper sensor (Q751) is off, the pickup clutch solenoid is

turned off to prevent overheating of the pickup clutch solenoid (SL1).

II: By the time the Copy Start key is pressed or the power switch is turned off and then on again

next time, the scanner is moved to and stopped at 105 mm forward from the home position.

Figure 3-106

3-6

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

5. Controlling the Scanner/Lens Drive Motor

a. Outline

The scanner/lens drive motor (M2) is a 4-phase stepping motor. The timing at which the drive

power (SC-COM) and pulses (SC-A, SCA*, SC-B, SC-B*) are generated is controlled to turn on/

off the scanner/lens drive motor (M2) or to switch the direction of its rotation.

DC controller PCB

+24VU

J110

R399

SC-COM

(Q101)

SC-COM

(Q109)

SC-A

SC-A*

Motor

SC-B

driver

circuit

SC-B*

Current switching signal 1

Current switching signal 2

Current switching signal 3

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-7

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

b. Operations

The microprocessor (Q101) mounted on the DC controller PCB receives instructions from the

control panel PCB copying mode settings (e.g., reproduction ratio). In response, it applies drive

pulses to the scanner/lens drive motor (M2) through the motor driver circuit.

The scanner motor is a 4-phase stepping motor, and changes the direction and speed of its

rotation according to the sequence and frequency of drive pulses (SC-A*through SC-B*).

The motor drive voltage is switched on and off by pulse signals (A through B*) generated by

the microprocessor (Q101). Any of these pulse signals is generated when the motor is in operation,

while no pulse signal is generated when the motor is at rest.

The current switching signals from 1 to 3 generated by the microprocessor (Q101) are used to

control the current flowing to the motor so that it varies according to the state of the scanner and the

lens.

Starting the lens Moving the lens

Reversing the

Forwarding the

scanner

Current switching signal 1

Current switching signal 2

Current switching signal 3

c. Detecting Overcurrent for the Scanner/Lens Drive Motor

If overcurrent flows to the scanner/lens drive motor for some reason, the fuse (R339) on the DC

controller PCB will blow to cut the power to the motor.

Caution:

The fuse (R339) will not recover once it has blown.

3-8

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM

A. Controlling the Scanning Lamp

1. Outline

Figure 3-201 shows the circuit used to control the scanning lamp, and has the following func-

tions:

• Turning on/off the scanning lamp.

• Controlling the intensity of the scanning lamp.

• Monitoring the state (on/off) of the scanning lamp.

Intensity adjustment

signal

(Q101)

(Q900)

Rectifying

circuit

PWM_1KHz

Phase

control

circuit

Thermal fuse

(FU1)

Serial

communication

Lamp activation

signal

Scanning lamp

(LA1)

LAMP_ON

(HIC001)

Arcing circuit

Activation detection

signal

Rectifying

circuit

LAMP_DETECT

Activation detection circuit

VR107

DC controller PCB

Composite power supply PCB

Figure 3-201

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-9

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

2. Operations

a. Turning On/Off the Scanning Lamp

The DC controller PCB and the composite power supply exchange signals in serial communi-

cation to control the scanning lamp. According to the scanner lamp active voltage signal, the mi-

croprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB controls the intensity adjustment signal

(PWM_1KHz) and the lamp activation signal (LAMP_ON) to turn on/off the scanning lamp

(LA1).

When LAMP_ON is ‘0’,

The phase control circuit turns on.

The arcing circuit turns on.

The scanning lamp turns on.

When LAMP_ON is ‘1’,

The phase control circuit turns off.

The arcing circuit turns off.

The scanning lamp turns off.

3-10

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

b. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp

The intensity of the lamp is controlled by the scanning lamp active voltage signal sent by the

DC controller PCB in serial.

The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB sends the intensity adjust-

ment signal (PWM_1KHz) in response to the scanning lamp active voltage signal. In turn, the

phase control circuit (HIC 001) controls the voltage supplied to the scanning lamp.

The PWM_1KHz signal varies according to the setting of VR107 mounted on the DC control-

ler PCB between 10% and 90% in terms of pulse duty ratio or between 50.5 and 80 V for the 120 V

model (between 85.7 and 145.8 V for the 220/240 V model) in terms of actual voltage by way of

phase control.

However, the intensity remains a specific value for AE exposure so that it is 56 V for the 120 V

model (108.5 V for the 220/240 V model) in terms of actual voltage.

t [msec]

<PWM_1KHz signal>

OFF

[msec]

1kHz

Pulse duty= t/

× 100 [%]

Figure 3-202

c. Monitoring the Activation of the Scanning Lamp

The activation detection signal (LAMP_DETECT) is sent to the microprocessor (Q900) on the

composite power supply PCB as long as the scanning lamp remains on.

The composite power supply PCB sends the lamp activation signal to the DC controller PCB in

serial by way of monitoring the activation of the scanning lamp (LA1).

Related Error Code

E220

• The lamp activation detection signal is not detected for 1 sec or more although the scan-

ning lamp activation signal has been sent.

• The lamp activation detection signal has been detected for 1 sec or more although the

scanning lamp activation signal is not sent.

If an error has been detected, the power switch will be turned off after indicating an error code

for 2 sec.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-11

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:

Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for

safety.

2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble

it.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and

Varistors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)

5. As necessary, cut the harness band.

6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.

7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any

screws indiscriminately.

3-12

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

A. Scanner Drive Assembly

1. Removing the Scanner/Lens Drive

Motor

1) Remove the front lower cover.

(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the

Front Lower Cover.”)

2) Remove the copyboard glass.

(See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing the

Copyboard Glass.”)

3) Remove the four screws [1], and detach

the lens cover [2].

[1]

[2]

Figure 3-301

4) Disconnect the connector (J110) [3] from

the DC controller PCB.

[3]

Figure 3-302

3-13

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

5) Open the machine’s top unit farther, and

hold it in position using the handle (about

30 mm in diameter) of a screwdriver.

Figure 3-303

6) Remove the machine’s two fixing screws

[4] from the scanner/lens drive motor [5].

[4]

[5]

[4]

Figure 3-304

3-14

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

7) Free the top unit (by removing the screw-

driver), and close the top unit.

8) Remove the E-ring [6]; then, lift the cable

drive pulley [7] slightly, and detach the

scanner/lens drive motor [5].

[6]

Lift.

[7]

[5]

Figure 3-305

3-15

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

2. Outline of the Scanner Drive Cable

Wind 1.5 times.

(black cable)

Wind 7.5 times.

(silver-colored cable)

Figure 3-306

3-16

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable

a. Before Starting the Work

Prepare the following:

• Mirror positioning tool

• Cable clip

• Adhesive tape

1) Set the mirror positioning tool as shown.

Figure 3-307

2) Prepare about five strips of adhesive tape

(each one about 20 × 50 mm).

3) Remove the copyboard glass.

(See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing the

Copyboard Glass.”)

4) Disconnect the connectors (J101, J131)

[1] from the DC controller PCB.

[1]

Figure 3-308

3-17

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

5) If the machine is equipped with an ADF,

free the hook [2], and disconnect the two

relay connectors [3] from the left upper

stay [4].

[4]

[2]

[3]

[2]

[3]

Figure 3-309

6) Remove the three screws [5], and detach

the left upper stay [4].

[5]

[4]

Figure 3-310

3-18

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

7) Remove the four screws [6], and detach

the lens cover [7].

[6]

[7]

Figure 3-311

3-19

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

b. Routing the Reversing Cable

1) Wind the reversing cables (silver-colored)

[2] on the cable drive pulley [1] 7.5 times

with the longer end on top; then, secure it

in position with a cable clip [3].

[1]

Longer end

Shorter end

[2]

Face with a marking

Figure 3-312

[3]

[1]

[3]

Top View

Figure 3-313

3-20

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

2) Put the cable drive pulley [1] into the shaft

[4], and secure it in position with an E-

ring [5].

[5]

When putting the cable drive pulley into

the shaft, be sure that the hook is at the

front.

Hook

[1]

(front)

[4]

Figure 3-314

3) Hook the shorter end [6] on the pulley [7].

[7]

[6]

Figure 3-315

3-21

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

4) Lead the shorter end [6] under the No. 1

mirror mount [8] and the No. 2/3 mirror

mount [9]; then, hook it on the left rear

pulley [10] and the pulley [11] of the No.

2/3 mirror mount.

[11]

[9]

[8]

[10]

[6]

Figure 3-316

[13]

[12]

5) After fitting the shorter end [6] on the

cable hook [12], secure its end with adhe-

sive tape [13].

[6]

Be sure that the secured end of the cable is

found where the hole in the left side plate

and the tip of the cable matches.

Figure 3-317

6) Lead the longer end [14] along the cable

drive pulley, and hook it on the pulley

[15] on the right front side.

[14]

[15]

Figure 3-318

3-22

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

7) Lead the longer end [14] under the No. 1

mirror mount [8] and the No. 2/3 mirror

mount [9]; then, hook it on the pulley [16]

on the left front side and the pulley [17] of

the No. 2/3 mirror mount.

[17]

[8]

[16]

[14]

[9]

Figure 3-319

8) Hook the longer end [14] on the cable

hook [18]; then, secure its end to the left

side with adhesive tape [19].

[18]

[19]

Be sure that the secured end of the cable is

found where the hole in the left side plate

and the tip of the cable matches.

[14]

Figure 3-320

3-23

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

c. Routing the Forwarding Cable

1) Fit the longer end forwarding cable

(black) [2] on the top hook of the cable

drive pulley [1], and wind it 1.5 times.

Then, secure the shorter end [3] as shown

with adhesive tape [4].

[4]

[3]

Face without a marking

[2]

[1]

Figure 3-321

2) Lead the longer end [5] along the cable

drive pulley [1] as shown, and hook it on

the pulley [6] on the right front side.

[1]

[5]

[6]

Figure 3-322

[8]

3) Lead the longer end [5] under the No. 1

mirror mount [7]; then, hook it on the pul-

ley [8] of the No. 2/3 mirror mount, and

lead it between the No. 1 mirror mount [7]

and the scanning lamp [9].

[7]

[9]

[5]

Figure 3-323

3-24

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

4) Hook the end of the longer end [5] on the

hole [10] on the right side.

[10]

[5]

Figure 3-324

5) Free the shorter end [3], and hook it on the

pulley [11] on the right rear side.

[3]

[11]

Figure 3-325

[12]

6) Lead the shorter end [3] under the No. 1

mirror mount [7], and hook it on the pul-

ley [12] of the No. 2/3 mirror mount as

shown; then, lead it between the No. 1

mirror mount [7] and the scanning lamp

[9].

[3]

[9]

[7]

Figure 3-326

3-25

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

[3]

[13]

7) Hook the end of the shorter end [3] on the

hole [13] on the right side.

Figure 3-327

8) Free the shorter end [3] and the longer end

[5] (reversing cable), and connect both

with a spring [14]; then, fit the stopper

[15].

[3]

[14]

[15]

[5]

Figure 3-328

3-26

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

9) Detach the pulley clip [16] from the cable

drive pulley [1].

[1]

[16]

Figure 3-329

3-27

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

d. Positioning the No. 1 Mirror Mount

1) Fix the rear and the front of the No. 1 mir-

ror mount [1] temporarily to the metal fix-

ing [2] of the forwarding cable.

[1]

[2]

Figure 3-330 (rear)

[2]

[1]

Figure 3-331 (front)

3-28

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

[3]

2) Turn the cable drive pulley [4] so that the

three shafts [3] of the mirror positioning

tool for rear and front is as shown.

[4]

[3]

Figure 3-332 (rear)

[3]

Figure 3-333 (front)

3-29

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3) While keeping the condition of step 2),

tighten the positioning screw on the rear

and front of the No. 1 mirror mount [1].

[1]

Figure 3-334 (rear)

[1]

Figure 3-335 (front)

3-30

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

B. Lens Drive Assembly

1. Removing the Lens Cable

1) Turn on the power; when the lens has

moved to the Direct position, disconnect

the power plug.

2) Remove the copyboard glass.

(See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing the

Copyboard Glass.”)

3) Remove the main drive assembly.

(See Chapter 7.III.D.2.“Removing the

Main Drive Assembly.”)

4) Remove the four screws [1], and detach

the lens cover [2].

[1]

[2]

Figure 3-336

3-31

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

[3]

5) Mark the position of the lens cable fixing

plate [3] and the lens mount [4] with a

scriber.

Marking

Caution:

When routing the lens cable, be sure to

refer to the marking made with a scriber.

[4]

Figure 3-337

6) Disengage the lever [5] of the No. 4/5 mir-

ror mount and the gear [6].

[5]

[6]

Figure 3-338

3-32

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

[7]

7) Remove the screw [7], and detach the cam

gear [6] and the cable retainer [8].

[6]

[8]

Figure 3-339

8) Holding the middle of the No. 1 mirror

mount [9], move it to the center of the

machine.

[9]

Caution:

Do not hold the reflecting plate.

Figure 3-340

9) Remove the spring [10].

[10]

Figure 3-341

3-33

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

[11]

10) Remove the screw [11], and detach the

lens cable fixing plate [12].

[12]

Figure 3-342

11) Free the lens cable [13] from the lens

cable fixing plate [12]; then, detach the

lens cable from the machine.

[13]

[12]

Figure 3-343

3-34

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

[2]

2. Routing the Lens Cable

[1]

1) After routing the lens cable, keep the lever

[1] of the No. 4/5 mirror mount disen-

gaged from the cam gear [2] (so that the

lever will not come into contact when the

cam gear rotates).

Figure 3-344

2) While keeping the condition in step 1),

turn on the power; when the No. 1 mirror

mount and the lens stopped moving, turn

off the power.

• The lens will move to the Direct posi-

tion.

[2]

3) Check to make sure that the tip of the le-

ver [1] of the No. 4/5 mirror mount and

the marking [3] on the top face of the cam

gear [2] match; then, engage the lever [1]

and the cam gear [2].

[3]

[1]

Figure 3-345

3-35

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

[4]

4) If the tip of the lever [1] and the marking

on the cam gear [2] do not match, remove

the fixing screw [4] of the cam gear [2]

and detach the cam gear; then, mount the

cam gear once again so that the marking

on it and the tip of the lever match.

[2]

[1]

Figure 3-346

3-36

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

C. Exposure System

1. Removing the Scanning Lamp

1) Disconnect the power plug.

2) Remove the copyboard glass.

(See Chapter 7.III.C.1. “Removing the

Copyboard Glass.”)

3) Holding the middle of the No. 1 mirror

mount [1], move the No. 1 mirror mount

[1] to the right by about 5 cm.

[1]

Cauiton:

Do not hold the reflecting plate.

Figure 3-347

4) Free the harness [3] from the guide [2];

then, remove the screw [4], and detach the

reflecting plate [5].

[4]

[5]

[3]

[2]

Figure 3-348

3-37

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

5) While pushing the electrode mount [6]

found at the rear of the machine in the di-

rection of the arrow, detach the scanning

lamp [7].

[6]

Caution:

1. Do not start the work if the scanning

lamp is hot.

2. Do not leave fingerprints on the sur-

face of the scanning lamp.

3. If the surface of the scanning lamp is

soiled, dry wipe it.

[7]

Figure 3-349

3-38

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

Logo mark

2. Points to Note When Mounting the

Lamp

When mounting the scanning lamp, be

sure that the logo mark (or the name of the

manufacturer) is toward the front. Further, be

sure that the protrusion near the middle of the

lamp is as shown.

Caution:

• Do not touch the lamp portion.

• If you have replaced the scanning lamp,

be sure to perform intensity adjustment (p.

11-42) and AE adjustment (p. 11-43).

(front)

Scanning lamp

(mirror mount moving in reverse)

45 (approx.)

Figure 3-350

3-39

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3. Removing the Thermal Fuse

1) Disconnect the power plug.

2) Remove the copyboard glass.

(See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing the

Copyboard Glass.”)

3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach

the thermal fuse [2].

[2]

[1]

Figure 3-351

Reflecting plate

4. Points to Note When Mounting the

Fuse

When mounting the thermal fuse, be sure

that the thermal fuse is oriented as shown.

Make sure that the fuse is in contact with

the reflecting plate.

(front)

Thermal fuse

Figure 3-352

3-40

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

5. Removing the Thermistor Unit

1) Remove the top cover.

(See Chapter 7.III.A.1. “Removing the

Top Cover.”)

2) Disconnect the connector (J131) [1] from

the DC controller PCB; remove the screw

[2], and detach the thermistor unit [3].

[2]

[3]

[1]

Figure 3-353

3-41

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4

IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

This chapter discusses the principles of how images are formed. It also explains the

timing at which the various units involved in image formation are operated, and shows

how they may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM ...4-1

A. Outline ...................................4-1

B. Timing Chart for the Image

Formation System .................4-3

C. Controlling the Primary

F. Measuring the Density of

Originals ............................. 4-16

G. Controlling the Side Blanking

Mechanism ......................... 4-21

II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 4-22

A. Cartridge ............................ 4-23

B. Transfer Charging

Charging Roller Bias .............4-4

D. Controlling the Transfer

Roller Bias .............................4-8

E. Controlling the Developing/

Separation Static Eliminator

Assembly............................ 4-25

C. Blank Exposure .................. 4-26

Bias .................................... 4-11

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

I. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

A. Outline

The major functions of the image formation system are as follows:

Item

Controlling the primary charging

roller bias

Description

AC constant current control, on/off control

DC constant voltage control, on/off control

DC voltage level control

Transfer roller bias control

DC constant voltage control, on/off control

DC constant current control (ATVC, cleaning bias)

Voltage level control

Polarity switching

Developing/separation static

eliminator bias control

DC constant voltage control, on/off control

AC constant voltage control, on/off control

DC voltage level control

Density control

Blanking control

Developing DC bias control

Side blanking lamp

Table 4-101

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-1

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Copyboard glass

Scanning lamp

Lens

AE sensor

Side

blanking

lamp

Developing cylinder

Primary charging roller

Photo-

sensitive

drum

Drum cartridge

Static eliminator

Transfer roller

Lamp regulator

block

High-voltage

circuit block

Q101

Microprocessor

Q900

Microprocessor

Composite power supply

PCB

DC controller PCB

Figure 4-101

4-2

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

B. Timing Chart for the Image Formation System

Basic Sequence of Operations (Direct, 2 copies, continuous)

Copy Start key

STBY INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV LSTR STBY

Main motor (M1)

Scanning lamp (LA1)

Scanner

forward

-625V

Reverse

Primary AC bias

Primary DC bias

Developing AC bias

Developing DC bias

Transfer bias

0.5sec.(approx.)

0.6sec.(approx.)

-400V

-500V

Transfer cleaning bias

Transfer reference

bias (ATVC)

0.6sec.(approx.)

3200V

Static eliminator bias

Pre-registration roller

paper sensor (Q751)

Figure 4-102

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-3

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

C. Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias

1. Outline

The circuit shown in Figure 4-103 is used to control the voltage applied to the primary charging

roller, and has the following functions:

• Turning on and off the DC/AC bias

• Controlling the DC bias to a specific voltage

• Controlling the AC bias to a specific voltage

• Switching the level of the DC bias

Both DC bias and AC bias are applied to the primary charging roller so as to ensure that the

surface potential of the photosensitive drum will be uniform. The level of the DC bias is switched

between when forming copy images and when not forming copy images.

Reference:

DC component:

AC component:

-400 V (non-image area)/-625 V (image area)

2000 Vpp to 3000 Vpp (885µA)

4-4

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Main

transformer

High-voltage

Primary

T101

transformer

Voltage

separation

circuit

charging

roller

T508

for primary

charging

Photosensitive

drum

Amplifier

Microprocessor (Q900)

Composite power supply PCB

Serial communication

Microprocessor (Q101)

DC controller PCB

Figure 4-103

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-5

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Operations

a. Turning On and Off the DC Bias

The DC bias applied to the primary charging roller is turned on or off by the serial communica-

tion signal and the primary charging bias ON signal (PR_DC_ON) from the DC controller PCB.

When the Copy Start key is pressed, the DC bias ON signal (serial) and the primary charging

bias ON signal (PR_DC_ON) are sent. The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply

PCB generates the DC bias control signal (PDC_PWM) based on the combination of the serial

signal and the PR_DC_ON signal, applying a DC bias to the primary charging roller.

DC bias ON signal

(8-bit signal communication)

PR_DC_ON

(J103-4)

bit0

bit1

–

DC bias ON

(image area)

DC bias ON

(non-image area)

DC bias OFF

Table 4-102 Relationship between DC Bias Output and Signal

b. Turning On and Off the AC Bias

The AC bias applied to the primary charging roller is turned on and off by the serial communi-

cation signal from the DC controller PCB.

When the AC bias ON signal arrives from the DC controller PCB, the microprocessor (Q900)

on the composite power supply PCB generates the AC bias output signal (PAC_OUT), thereby

applying an AC bias to the primary charging roller.

c. Controlling the DC/AC Bias to a Specific Voltage/Current

The DC bias and the AC bias applied to the primary charging roller are controlled by the

microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB so that they remain a specific level.

When a DC/AC bias is generated, the microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply

PCB detects the DC voltage monitor signal (PDC_S) and the AC component current monitor signal

(PAC_S), compares their levels against the reference levels, and varies the DC bias control signal

(PDC_PWM) and the AC bias output signal (PAC_OUT) according to the differences so as to

ensure that they remain specific levels.

Reference:

The DC bias control signal varies its pulse duty ratio while the AC bias output signal varies its

amplitude to change the level of the DC/AC bias.

4-6

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

d. Switching the DC Bias Level

The machine switches the DC bias level between the copy image area (-625 V) and the non-

copy image area (-400 V).

The level of the DC bias is switched by the DC bias ON signal (serial signal) generated by the

DC controller PCB.

The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB varies the DC bias control

signal (PDC_PWM) to switch the level of the DC bias. (See Table 4-102.)

Reference:

The machine applies a DC bias over a non-copy image area (between sheets) so as to prevent

charging the photosensitive drum to a positive potential otherwise caused by the cleaning bias

from the transfer roller.

Copy Start key

STBY INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV LSTR STBY

Main motor (M1)

Scanning lamp (LA1)

Primary DC bias

Primary AC bias

-400V

-625V

Figure 4-104

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-7

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

D. Controlling the Transfer Roller Bias

1. Outline

The circuit shown in Figure 4-105 is used to control the voltage applied to the transfer charging

roller, and has the following functions:

• Turning on and off the transfer bias.

• Controlling the transfer bias to a constant voltage.

• Correcting the transfer bias voltage level (ATVC)

• Switching the transfer bias polarity (cleaning bias)

Main

transformer

Transfer positive DC

bias generation circuit

T101

Photo-

Transfer positive DC bias ON signal

T_REV_ON*

sensitive

drum

Transfer overcurrent detection signal

HV_LIMIT

(Q101)

(Q900)

Transfer

charging

roller

Transfer current detection signal

T_FW_S

Transfer bias voltage

detection signal

Transfer bias

T_FEEDBACK

detection circuit

Transfer DC bias

control signal

T_FW_DRV

Serial

communi-

cation

Transfer bias

control circuit

+24V

T302

Transfer

high-voltage

transformer

Transfer DC bias ON signal

T_FW_ON

High-voltage transformer

control signal

CLK32K

DC controller PCB

Composite power supply PCB

Figure 4-105

4-8

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Operations

a. Turning On and Off the Transfer Bias

The transfer bias applied to the transfer charging roller is turned on and off by the serial com-

munication signal from the DC controller PCB.

When the transfer bias ON signal (serial signal) is generated by the DC controller PCB, the

microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB generates the high-voltage trans-

former control signal (CLK32K), transfer DC bias ON signal (T_FW_ON), and transfer DC bias

control signal (T_FW_DRV), thereby applying the transfer bias to the transfer charging roller.

Transfer bias ON signal

(serial communication)

T-FW_ON signal

T_REV_ON* signal

bit2

bit3

Negative transfer bias ON

Positive transfer bias ON

(cleaning bias)

Transfer bias OFF

ATVC

Table 4-103 Relationship between Transfer Bias Output and Signals

b. Controlling the Transfer Bias to a Specific Voltage

The transfer bias applied to the transfer charging roller is controlled to a specific level by the

microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB.

When a transfer bias is generated, the microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply

PCB checks the transfer bias voltage detection signal (T_FEEDBACK), compares it against the

reference value, and varies the transfer DC bias control signal (T_FW_DRV) according to the

difference to ensure that the transfer bias remains a specific level at all times.

Reference:

The level of transfer bias applied to the transfer roller during a copying run is between -7.5

and -3.0 kV.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-9

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

c. Correcting the Transfer Bias Voltage Level (ATVC control)

The machine automatically corrects the application voltage level of the transfer bias to correct

the changes in the transfer efficiency caused by the deterioration of the transfer roller or the

changes in the environment.

A current of a specific level (-14.6 µA) is applied to the transfer charging roller during initial

rotation executed each time the Copy Start key is pressed. The microprocessor (Q900) on the com-

posite power supply PCB checks the transfer current detection signal (T_FW_S), and varies the

transfer bias applied to the transfer charging roller so that it will be an appropriate level.

Reference:

While the transfer charging roller makes a single rotation, the microprocessor (Q900) checks

the transfer current detection signal four times, and determines the level of the transfer bias to

apply using the average of the readings.

d. Switching the Polarity of the Transfer Bias (cleaning bias)

The machine uses a direct charging method, allowing toner to move from the photosensitive

drum to the transfer roller as when a jam occurs if left unattended.

To remove excess toner, a positive voltage is applied to the transfer roller as follows, thereby

returning the toner from the roller to the drum:

< Timing >

• While initial rotation is executed after the Copy Start key is pressed

• Part of the period in which the scanner is moved in reverse

• Part of the period in which last rotation is executed

The polarity of the transfer bias is switched by the transfer bias ON signal (serial signal) gener-

ated by the DC controller PCB.

In response to the signal, the microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB

causes the transfer positive DC bias On signal (T_REV_ON*) to go ‘0’, so that the positive compo-

nent of the transfer bias (constant current control, + 1.56µA/2.5 kV max.) will be applied to the

transfer roller. (See Table 4-103.)

Copy Start key

STBY INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV LSTR STBY

Main motor (M1)

Cleaning bias

1.6sec(approx.)

1.2sec (approx.)

0.7sec (approx.)

0.8sec (approx.)

Reference bias (ATVC)

Transfer bias

Figure 4-106

4-10

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

E. Controlling the Developing/Separation Static Eliminator Bias

1. Outline

The circuit shown in Figure 4-107 is used to control the voltage applied to the developing

assembly and the separation static eliminator, and has the following functions:

• Turning on and off the developing DC bias

• Turning on and off the AC bias (turning on and off the static eliminator bias)

• Controlling the voltage level of the developing DC bias

Both AC bias and DC bias are applied to the developing cylinder while copies are being made.

When the photosensitive drum rotates and yet developing is not under way, about -500 VDC is

applied to the developing cylinder regardless of the position of the density adjusting lever, thereby

preventing adhesion of excess toner on the photosensitive drum.

Reference :

Developing DC bias : -80 ~ -550V

Developing AC bias : 1200Vpp ± 10%

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-11

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

High-voltage transformer

for developing/static eliminator

Main

transformer

Developing

T201

DC bias

detection

circuit

Photo

sensitive

drum

T101

Developing

cylinder

+5V

Static

eliminator

bias generation

circuit

Static eliminator

Microprocessor (Q900)

Composite power supply PCB

Serial communication

Microprocessor (Q101)

Density

correction

switch (SW101)

DC controller PCB

AE sensor

PCB

Control

panel

Figure 4-107

4-12

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Turning On and Off the DC Bias

The DC bias applied to the developing cylinder is turned on and off by the signal communica-

tion signal and the developing DC bias ON signal (DV_DC_ON) generated by the DC controller

PCB.

When the developing DCON signal (serial signal) and the developing DC bias ON sign

(DV_DC_ON) are generated by the DC controller PCB, the microprocessor (Q900) on the com-

posite power supply PCB sends the DC bias control signal (BIAS_PWM), thereby applying a DC

bias to the developing cylinder.

Developing DCON signal

(Serial communication)

DV_DC_ON

(J103-3)

bit5

–

bit6

DC bias ON

(- 500V)

DC bias OFF

Table 4-104 Relationship between Developing DC Bias and Signals

3. Turning On and Off the AC Bias

The AC bias is turned on and off by the developing AC bias ON signal (DV_AC_ON) gener-

ated by the DC controller PCB.

The DC controller PCB sends the developing AC bias ON signal (DV_AC_ON) to the com-

posite power supply PCB a specific period of time after copy paper has moved past the registration

sensor. The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB generates the AC bias

oscillation signal (ACBIAS) so that an AC bias is applied to the developing cylinder.

The AC bias is modified/rectified and then supplied to the static eliminator (static eliminator

bias, about 3.2 kV).

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-13

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4. Controlling the Voltage Level of the Developing DC Bias

The DC bias control signal (BIAS_PWM) is varied according to the following settings to

change the DC component of the developing bias so as to control the copy density:

• Setting of the density adjusting lever (in manual adjustment mode)

• Output of the AE sensor (in automatic control mode)

• Setting of copy mode (toner save mode, photo mode)

• Setting of the density correction switch (SW101)

The density correction switch (SW101) mounted on the DC controller PCB may be set to any

of three levels, enabling correction of foggy images or light images caused as by a change in the

sensitivity of the photosensitive drum.

The density correction switch (SW101) affects both manual density adjustment and auto den-

sity adjustment (AE).

SW101

Figure 4-108

If the machine is not equipped with a density correction switch (SW101), the image density

changes in AE mode according to how the density adjusting lever is set.

The machine corrects the level of the developing DC bias and the voltage supplied to the

scanning lamp as follows in reference to the setting used for normal copying when toner save mode

or photo mode is selected.

Toner save mode

Photo mode

+15V

Developing DC bias

Voltage supplied to

the scanning lamp

-75V

-2V^*1

-3V^*2

-2V^*1

-3V^*2

*1: 120 V model

*2: 220 / 240 V model

Table 4-105 Relationship between Copying Mode and Voltage Correction Level

Figures 4-109 through -112 show the changes in the DC bias occurring as a result of changes in

the output of the AE sensor during auto density correction and how the density adjusting lever is set

during manual density adjustment.

4-14

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Copy density adjusting lever

Original

Newspaper

density

3.5

6.5

Test sheet

-100

-200

-300

-400

-500

-100

-200

-300

-400

-500

Position of

SW101

Right

Center

Left

Position of

SW101

Right

Center

Left

Developing bias

DC component (V)

Developing bias

DC component (V)

Manual Density Mode

AE Mode

Figure 4-109 (SW101)

Figure 4-110 (SW101)

Copy density adjusting lever

3.5 6.5

Original

density

Test sheet

Newspaper

-100

-200

-300

-400

-500

-100

-200

-300

-400

-500

Developing bias

DC component (V)

Developing bias

DC component (V)

Manual Density Mode

AE Mode

Figure 4-111 (Non-SW101)

Figure 4-112 (Non-SW101)

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-15

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

F. Measuring the Density of Originals

1. Outline

The machine is equipped with an auto density adjustment (AE) mechanism designed to control

the DC component of the developing bias.

The AE mechanism enables production of copies free of fogging as long as the original is more

or less uniform in density by varying the DC component of the developing bias according to the

density of the original.

Scanning lamp

Developing

cylinder

VR103

(Q101)

Photo-

sensitive

drum

J601 J107

-3 -2

+24V

AEREF

+5V

+24V

-2

-3

(Q900)

+5V

AE sensor

Developing

DCON signal

+24V

Serial

communi-

cation

VR102

Composite power

supply PCB

DC controller PCB

Figure 4-113

4-16

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Operations

When measuring the density of an original, the scanner turns on the scanning lamp, and moves

to a point 115 mm from the home position. At this time, the AE sensor reads the level of light

reflected by the area shown in Figure 4-112, and sends the AE signal (AE) to the DC controller

PCB.

In response, the DC controller PCB sends the developing DCON signal (serial communica-

tion) to the composite power supply PCB according to the level of the AE signal. The microproces-

sor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB controls the level of the DC bias applied to the

developing cylinder based on the level of this signal.

68.8mm

(approx.)

23.5mm

(approx.)

5.8mm

(approx.)

Middle of

original

37.7mm

(approx.)

: Area read by AE sensor

Figure 4-114

Copy Start key

STBY INTR AER

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV LSTR STBY

Main motor (M1)

Scanner / lens drive

motor (M2)

Scanning lamp (LA1)

AE signal (AE)

Figure 4-115

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-17

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. AE Adjustment (VR102, VR103)

If you have replaced the scanning lamp or the AE sensor PCB, make adjustments as follows:

Operating Procedure

Before Starting the Work

• Obtain a newspaper showing more or less even print. (Do not use one with many photos or

large headings.)

• Obtain five sheets of white sheets of paper.

• Check to make sure that the intensity of the scanning lamp has been adjusted when you have

replaced the scanning lamp.

• Set the density correction switch (SW101) to the middle setting. If the machine is not

equipped with a density correction switch, set the density adjusting lever to the middle set-

ting.

1) Short JP103 and JP104 on the DC controller PCB with a screwdriver or the like.

J104

J103

Figure 4-116

4-18

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2) While keeping the condition in step 1), turn on the power switch.

• The scanning lamp will turn on, an the main motor (M1) will rotate.

3) Stop shorting JP103 and JP104.

4) Turn VR103 on the DC controller PCB fully clockwise.

VR103

Figure 4-117

5) Place a newspaper on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.

6) Turn VR102 so that the reading in the indicator is from ‘A3’ to ‘Ad’.

VR102

Figure 4-118

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-19

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

7) Remove the newspaper from the copyboard; in its place, place five blank sheets of copy paper,

and close the copyboard cover.

8) Turn VR103 on the DC controller PCB so that the reading of the indicator is from ‘52’ to ‘5c’.

VR103

Figure 4-119

9) Repeat steps 5) through 8) so that the values of both VR102 and VR103 are target values.

Caution:

If you cannot set VR102 and VR103 to the target values at the same time, turn VR103 fully

counterclockwise, and go back to step 5) and make adjustments once again.

10) Make a copy, and check to make sure that it is free of fogging and the density of its characters

is good.

• If it is foggy or the characters are too light, go back to step 1) and start over.

• If no change is noted after re-adjustment, use the density correcting switch (SW101).

Lighter

Darker

SW101

Figure 4-120

4-20

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

G. Controlling the Side Blanking Mechanism

1. Outline

The machine is equipped with a side blanking lamp at the front and the rear used to prevent

adhesion of excess toner when making reduced copies.

2. Operations

To blank out the non-image area in reduce mode, the side blanking lamp is moved in relation to

the distance over which the lens moves as detected by the lens shift detecting shaft.

Rear side

blanking lamp

Reflecting

plate

Lens shift detecting shaft

Front side

blanking lamp

Reflecting

plate

(front)

Figure 4-121

Photosensitive drum

Non-image area in Reduce mode

A: Position of the side blanking lamp in Direct and Reduce mode

B: Position of the side blanking lamp in Reduce mode

Figure 4-122

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-21

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:

Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for

safety.

2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble

it.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varis-

tors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)

5. As necessary, cut the harnessband.

6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.

7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any

screws indiscriminately.

4-22

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

A. Cartridge

1. Outline

The machine's photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing assembly, and cleaner

are housed in a single container referred to as a “cartridge.” (You cannot disassemble the cartridge.)

Developing blade

Primary charging roller

Light-blocking shutter

Photosensitive

drum

Cleaning blade

Developing cylinder

Drum cover shutter

Figure 4-201

a. Drum Cover Shutter

If exposed to strong light for a long time, the photosensitive drum can develop photo memory,

which can cause white spots or black bands on copies.

To prevent photo memory, the machine is equipped with a drum cover shutter. Do not open the

shutter unless absolutely necessary. It is designed to open when the cartridge is fit into the machine

and the machine's top unit is closed.

b. Light-Blocking Shutter

When the cartridge is removed from the machine, light makes its way through the opening used

to expose images. As in the case of the drum cover shutter, the light-blocking shutter is provided to

protect the photosensitive drum from light.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-23

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Cleaning the Drum

Caution:

As a rule, do not touch or clean the photosensitive drum.

1) Open the machine's top unit, and take out the cartridge.

2) Turn over the cartridge, and open the drum cover shutter

3) Clean the drum surface with a flannel cloth coated with toner.

Caution:

1. If you need to rotate the drum, be sure to rotate it in the direction in which it rotates when

making copies. Otherwise, the leaf spring used to apply a developing bias to the develop-

ing cylinder will develop poor contact.

2. If you must clean it, use a flannel cloth. Do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.

3. If exposed to light for an appreciable time, the images will be affected. Be sure to work

briskly.

Reference:

If the photosensitive drum is exposed to light of 1500 lux (ordinary lighting) for 5 min and

then is left alone for 5 min in a dark place, it will recover to a level at which it will cause no

practical problem.

However, avoid exposing it to direct sunlight. The rays of the sun are usually about 10000 to

30000 lux.

4-24

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

B. Transfer Charging

Assembly

1. Removing the Transfer Charging

Roller

1) Open the machine's top unit.

2) Remove the screw [1].

[2]

3) While freeing the claw [2] of the bushing,

detach the transfer charging roller [3].

Caution:

Do not touch the surface of the roller. Be

sure the surface is free of dirt.

[3]

[2]

[1]

Figure 4-202

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-25

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

C. Blank Exposure

1. Removing the Blanking Exposure

Unit

1) Set the machine to the maximum ratio

(141%) as follows:

• Turn on the power, and select a default

ratio of 141%.

• Press the Copy Start key.

• When the lens has moved to the farthest

left, turn off the power.

• Disconnect the power plug.

2) Remove the front lower cover.

(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the

Front Lower Cover.”)

3) Remove the cartridge.

4) Remove the DC controller PCB.

(See Chapter 7.III.E.1.“Removing the DC

controller PCB.”)

5) Remove the composite power supply

PCB.

(See Chapter 7.III.E.2.“Removing the

Composite Power Supply PCB.”)

6) Remove the two screws [1].

[1]

Figure 4-203

4-26

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

7) Open the machine’s top unit farther, and

hold it in place using the handle of a

screwdriver (about 30 mm in diameter).

Figure 4-204

8) Remove the four screws [3], and discon-

nect the connector [4]; then, detach the

blanking exposure unit. [5].

[5]

[4]

[3]

Figure 4-205

Caution:

When mounting the blanking exposure

unit, check to make sure that the blank-

ing exposure unit PCBs are at the ex-

treme ends and that the lens is positioned

at the farthest left (141% position).

Lamp PCBs

Figure 4-206

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-27

CHAPTER 5

PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

This chapter explains the principles used from when copy paper is picked up to when

a copy is delivered in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in

relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/

assembled and adjusted.

I. PICKUP/FEEDING SYSTEM.......5-1

A. Outline ...................................5-1

B. Controlling the Pickup

Roller .....................................5-3

C. Controlling the Movement of

Paper .....................................5-9

D. Detecting Jams .................. 5-12

II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 5-18

A. Pickup Assembly ................ 5-19

B. Multifeeder Assembly ......... 5-28

C. Single-feeder Assembly ..... 5-31

D. Feeding Assembly.............. 5-33

E. Registration Roller

Assembly............................ 5-34

F. Delivery Assembly.............. 5-36

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

I. PICKUP/FEEDING SYSTEM

A. Outline

The machine moves paper using a center reference method, in which paper is moved in the

middle of the pickup/feeding path, and is equipped with a cassette, multifeeder, and single-feeder

as the source of paper.

From the cassette, multifeeder, or single-feeder, copy paper is picked up and is controlled by

the registration roller so that its leading edge will match the leading edge of the image on the

photosensitive drum; it is then moved through the transfer, separation, feeding, and fixing assem-

blies to reach the copy tray.

The machine is equipped with four sensors used to monitor the movement of copy paper.

Notation

Name

Delivery sensor

Remarks

PS3

PS4

PS5

Vertical path roller paper sensor

Single-feeder paper sensor

Single-feeder model only

Q751

Pre-registration roller paper sensor

Table 5-101

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-1

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

DC controller PCB

Multifeeder

pickup roller

Photosensitive

drum

Registration roller

Delivery roller

Copy tray

PS4

Vertical

PS3

Q751

Static

Cassette

pickup roller

Fixing assembly

eliminator

path roller

Cassette

Holding plate

Figure 5-101 (Multifeeder type)

DC controller PCB

Single-

feeder

pickup

roller

Photosensitive

drum

PS5

Registration roller

Delivery roller

Copy tray

PS4

Vertical

PS3

Q751

Cassette

pickup roller

Static

eliminator

Fixing assembly

path roller

Cassette

Holding plate

Figure 5-102 (Single-feeder type)

5-2

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

B. Controlling the Pickup Roller

1. Outline

The machine has three types of pickup rollers, i.e., cassette pickup roller, multifeeder pickup

roller, and single-feeder pickup roller, and each of these rollers are operated by the drive of the

main motor switched by means of a gear unit. (In other words, only one roller is driven at any one

time.)

2. Controlling the Cassette Pickup Roller

The cassette pickup roller is controlled by a spring clutch, control ring, pickup clutch solenoid

(SL1), and cassette pickup solenoid (SL5).

When the pickup clutch solenoid turns on, the claw moves away from the control ring, allow-

ing the drive to move to the pickup gear assembly through the spring clutch. Then, when the cas-

sette pickup solenoid turns on, the drive reaches the cassette pickup roller.

When the cassette pickup roller starts to rotate, copy paper is picked up from the cassette and is

sent as far as the registration roller by way of the vertical path roller. The registration roller controls

paper so that its leading edge will match the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum.

Spring

Gear

DC controller PCB

Pickup roller

Pickup roller gear

Arm

When SL5 turns on, the spring causes

the pickup roller to rotate slightly,

causing the gear and the pickup roller

gear to engage.

SL1

Cassette pickup rollers

Pickup clutch

SL5

Copy paper

Figure 5-103 (Multifeeder type)

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-3

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Spring

Gear

DC controller PCB

Pickup roller

Pickup roller gear

When SL5 turns on, the spring causes

the pickup roller to rotate slightly,

causing the gear and the pickup roller

gear to engage.

Arm

SL1

Cassette pickup rollers

Pickup clutch

SL5

Copy paper

Figure 5-104 (Single-feeder type)

5-4

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3. Re-Pickup (cassette pickup)

If the vertical path roller paper sensor (PS4) does not detect copy paper within a specific period

of time after the cassette pickup roller has started to rotate, the pickup roller is rotated once again to

execute pickup operation, thereby ensuring correct pickup (as for recycled paper).

If the vertical path roller paper sensor does not detect copy paper after re-pickup, the machine

will assume the absence of copy paper and will indicate “ ” in the count/ratio indicator in the

control panel. (This mechanism substitutes a paper detecting mechanism.)

Copy Start key

STBY

INTR

SCFW

SCRV LSTR

STBY

Main motor (M1)

0.7sec (approx.)

Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)

Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)

Vertical path roller paper

sensor (PS4)

I : Re-pickup operation is executed if the vertical path roller paper sensor (PS4) does not detect

copy paper within 0.5 sec after the pickup clutch solenoid (SL1) has turned don.

II: The cassette pickup solenoid (SL5) turns on once again about 1.3 sec after the pickup clutch

solenoid (SL1) turns on.

Figure 5-105

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-5

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

4. Controlling the Multifeeder Pickup Roller

The multifeeder pickup roller is controlled by a spring clutch, control ring, pickup clutch sole-

noid (SL1), gear unit, and multifeeder pickup solenoid (SL4).

When the multifeeder pickup solenoid (SL4) turns on, the drive of the main motor (M1)

reaches the cam gear. When the cam gear starts to rotate in response, the lifter, which is in contact

with the cam, moves up the gear unit and, at the same time, pushes down the paper guide plate. The

cam gear makes a 180° turn (approximate), and stops at the toothless section.

When the pickup solenoid turns on in this condition, the claw leaves the control ring, and the

drive of the main motor (M1) reaches the multifeeder pickup roller.

When the multifeeder pickup roller rotates, paper is picked up and sent as far as the registration

roller, which controls the paper so that its leading edge will match the leading edge of the image on

the photosensitive drum.

DC controller PCB

Paper guide

plate

SL1

SL4

Cam gear

Copy paper

Multifeeder pickup roller

Spring clutch

Lifter

Control ring

Claw

Cam gear

Paper guide plate

Toothless section

The cam gear makes a 180˚ turn (approximate),

causing the paper guide plate to move up and down.

Figure 5-106

5-6

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5. Controlling the Single-feeder Pickup Roller

The single-feeder pickup roller is controlled by the pickup clutch solenoid (SL1) and the

single-feeder paper sensor (PS5).

When copy paper is inserted into the single-feeder, the single-feeder paper sensor turns on and

the main motor starts to rotate. The drive of the main motor reaches the signal feeder pickup roller

through a gear.

When the single-feeder pickup roller starts to rotate, copy paper is picked up from the signal

feeder and is sent as far as the registration roller, which controls the paper so that its leading edge

will match the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum.

DC controller PCB

Single-feeder

paper sensor

SL1

PS5

Copy paper

Single-feeder Pickup roller

Pickup clutch

Figure 5-107

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-7

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

6. Controlling the Copying Speed in Multifeeder Mode

The machine does not possess a copy paper width detecting function and, therefore, the tem-

perature of the ends of the fixing assembly increases when copies are made continuously on paper

narrower than A4/LTR.

When the multifeeder is used for continuous copying, a delay is initiated after picking up the

19th sheet so as to increase the sheet-to-sheet distance for the sheets that follow, controlling the

copying speed to 9 cpm.

If the copying speed is controlled (to 6 cpm) by a mechanism to prevent overheating of the

copyboard, this control will not be executed, and moreover if the temperature of the copyboard

increases during 9-cpm control, 6-cpm control will be initiated.

Switching to 9-cpm copying speed

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

Main motor (M1)

19th copy

Delivery sensor (PS3)

Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)

Pre-registration roller

paper sensor (Q751)

I: A switch to 9-cpm copying mode is made after delivering the 19th copy in a continuous

copying job.

Figure 5-108

5-8

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

C. Controlling the Movement of Paper

1. Controlling the Registration Roller

The registration roller is controlled by a spring clutch, control ring, pre-registration roller paper

sensor (Q751), and registration clutch solenoid (SL2).

The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB turns on the registration clutch solenoid at a

specific timing in response to the paper detection signal from the pre-registration roller paper sen-

sor. When the registration clutch solenoid turns on, the claw will leave the control ring, and the

drive of the main motor will reach the registration roller to move the copy paper to the photosensi-

tive drum.

Spring clutch

Registration roller

Control ring

Paper detecting lever

Copy paper

Claw

SL2

Pre-

registration

roller

paper

sensor

(Q751)

Pre-registration roller paper detection signal (RPD)

DC controller PCB

Figure 5-109

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-9

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Pickup/Feeding Timing Chart

a. Pickup from the Cassette (A4, 2 copies)

Copy Start key

STBY INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV LSTR STBY

Main motor (M1)

Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)

0.1sec (approx.)

Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)

Vertical path roller

paper sensor (PS4)

Pre-registration roller

paper sensor (Q751)

0.3sec (approx.)

Reverse

Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)

0.7sec (approx.)

Delivery sensor (PS3)

Forward

Scanner

Figure 5-110

b. Pickup from the Single-feeder (A4, 1 copy)

Copy paper in

STBY

INTR

SCFW

SCRV LSTR STBY

Main motor (M1)

0.3sec (approx)

Single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)

Pre-registration roller

paper sensor (Q751)

Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)

Delivery sensor (PS3)

Scanner

Forward Reverse

Figure 5-111

5-10

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

c. Pickup from the Multifeeder (A4, 2 copies)

Copy Start key

STBY INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV LSTR STBY

Main motor (M1)

Multifeeder pickup solenoid (SL4)

1sec

0.1sec(approx.)

Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)

Pre-registration roller

paper sensor (Q751)

0.3sec (approx.)

Reverse

Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)

Delivery sensor (PS3)

Scanner

0.7sec (approx.)

Forward

I : Varied by value under ‘30’ of service mode (registration adjustment).

II: Used for measuring the length of copy paper.

length of copy paper (mm) = 96 (mm/s) × II (s) + 11 (mm) -10 (mm)

96 (mm/s) : speed at which copy paper is moved.

11 (mm) : distance between pre-registration roller paper sensor and registration roller.

10 (mm) : length of actuator of the pre-registration roller paper sensor.

Figure 5-112

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-11

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

D. Detecting Jams

The machine is equipped with four paper sensors used to find out the presence/absence of copy

paper and whether copy paper is moving properly.

• Vertical path roller paper sensor (PS4)

• Single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)

• Pre-registration roller paper sensor (Q751)

• Delivery sensor (PS3)

The presence/absence of a jam is checked with reference to the presence/absence of paper over

a specific sensor at such times as programmed in the microprocessor.

The machine is not equipped with a function which remembers the remaining number of cop-

ies to make at time of a jam and the selected copying mode; in other words, it will be reset to

standard mode when it is opened and closed for the removal of the jam.

The microprocessor possesses the following eight types of no paper/jam detection sequence; if

any of its sensors detects copy paper at power-on, the machine will identify the condition as a jam.

Multifeeder pickup roller

Photosensitive drum

Delivery roller

Registration roller

PS4

PS3

Q751

Cassette pickup

roller

Vertical

path roller

Fixing assembly

Cassette

Figure 5-113 (Multifeeder type)

Single-feeder

pickup roller

Photosensitive drum

PS5

Delivery roller

Registration roller

PS4

PS3

Fixing assembly

Cassette

Q751

Vertical

path roller

Cassette pickup

roller

Figure 5-114 (Single-feeder type)

5-12

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

1. Multifeeder Pickup Assembly (no paper, pickup delay jam)

If copy paper does not reach the pre-registration roller paper sensor within a specific period of

time in multifeeder mode, the condition will be identified as the absence of paper; the machine will

stop the main motor in about 1.5 sec, and indicate the Add Paper message.

If the pre-registration roller paper sensor detects copy paper during this 1.5 sec period (ap-

proximate), the machine will identify the condition as a pickup delay jam, and flash the Jam indica-

tor.

Copy Start key

STBY

INTR

SCFW

Normal

Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)

Jam check

Pre-registration roller paper

sensor (Q751)

2.6sec

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-115 (normal)

Copy Start key

P indication

SCFW

STBY

INTR

Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)

Jam check

2.6sec

Pre-registration roller paper

sensor (Q751)

No paper

1.5sec

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-116 (no paper)

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-13

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Copy Start key

indication

SCFW

STBY

INTR

Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)

Jam check

2.6sec

Pre-registration roller paper

sensor (Q751)

No paper

Jam

1.5sec

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-117 (jam)

2. Absence of Paper in the Cassette Pickup Assembly

When re-pickup operation is executed (from the cassette) , the absence of paper will be identi-

fied if copy paper doesnot reach the vertical path roller paper sensor within a specific period of

time. In responce, the machine will stop the main motor in about 1.5 sec, and indicate the Add

Paper message.

Copy Start key

P indication

STBY INTR

SCFW

Re-pickup

1.2sec 1.2sec

Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)

1.2sec

Jam check

Vertical path roller

paper sensor (PS4)

Normal

No paper

1.5sec

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-118

5-14

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3. Single-feeder Pickup Delay Jam

After being detected by the single-feeder paper sensor, if copy paper does not reach the pre-

registration roller sensor within a specific period of time, the machine will identify the condition as

a single feed pickup delay jam, stop the operation immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.

Copy paper inserted

STBY

INTR

SCFW

Single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)

5.1 sec

Jam check

Pre-registration roller paper

Jam

1.5 sec

sensor (Q751)

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-119

4. Vertical Path Stationary Jam

If copy paper fails to move past the vertical path roller paper sensor within a specific period of

time because of faulty feeding, the machine will identify the condition as a vertical path stationary

jam, stop the operation, and flash the Jam indicator.

indication

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)

0.5sec

Normal

0.5sec

Jam

1.5sec

Jam check

Vertical path roller

paper sensor (PS4)

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-120

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-15

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5. Registration Paper Delay Jam

After reaching the vertical path roller paper sensor, if copy paper fails to reach the pre-registra-

tion roller paper sensor within a specific period of time, the machine will identify the condition as

a registration paper delay jam, stop the operation immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.

indication

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

Vertical path roller

paper sensor (PS4)

2.6sec

Jam check

Pre-registration roller

paper sensor (Q751)

Normal

Jam

1.5sec

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-121

6. Registration Paper Stationary Jam

If copy paper does not move past the pre-registration roller paper sensor within a specific

period of time because of feeding faults, the machine will identify the condition as a registration

paper stationary jam, stop the operation immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.

Copy Start key

indication

STBY

INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)

4.6sec

Jam check

Pre-registration roller

paper sensor (Q751)

Normal

Jam

1.5sec

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-122

5-16

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

7. Delivery Delay Jam

If copy paper does not reach the delivery sensor within a specific period of time because of

feeding faults, the machine will identify the condition as a delivery delay jam, stop the operation

immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.

Copy Start key

indication

STBY

INTR

SCFW

4.1sec

SCRV

SCFW

4.1sec

Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)

Jam check

normal

Jam

Delivery sensor (PS3)

Main motor (M1)

1.5sec

Figure 5-123

8. Delivery Stationary Jam

If copy paper does not move past the delivery sensor within a specific period of time because of

feeding faults, the machine will identify the condition as a delivery stationary jam, stop the opera-

tion immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.

indication

SCFW

SCRV

4.1sec

SCFW

SCRV

4.1sec

SCFW

Jam check

Normal

Jam

Delivery sensor (PS3)

Main motor (M1)

1.5sec

Figure 5-124

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-17

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:

Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for

safety.

2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble

it.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varis-

tors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)

5. As necessary, cut the harnessband.

6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.

7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any

screws indiscriminately.

5-18

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

A. Pickup Assembly

1. Removing the Pickup Roller

1) Pull out the cassette.

2) Remove the front lower cover.

(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the

Front Lower Cover.”)

3) Open the machines' top unit farther, and

hold it in place with the handle of a screw-

driver (about 30 mm in diameter).

Figure 5-201

4) Remove the screw [1], and free the two

claws [2]; then, detach the feeding assem-

bly cover [3].

[1]

[2]

[3]

Figure 5-202

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-19

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

[5]

5) While pulling the guide plate [4] of the

cassette pickup solenoid in the direction

of the arrow, turn the gear [5] slightly in

the direction of the arrow to disengage the

guide plate [4] and the gear [6].

[6]

[4]

Figure 5-203

6) While pulling the plunger [7] of the

pickup solenoid, turn the gear [8] in the

direction of the arrow so that the pickup

roller [9] is oriented as shown.

[7]

[9]

[8]

Figure 5-204

5-20

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Hex wrench

7) Using a hex wrench or the like, push the

hook [10] of the pickup roller through the

hole to remove the pickup roller [11].

[10]

Caution:

When removing the pickup roller, be

sure to push the claw while holding the

shaft in place so as to prevent the pickup

roller shaft from freeing itself.

Pickup roller shaft

[11]

Figure 5-205

Caution:

When mounting the multifeeder unit,

perform the next steps first:

1) Turn on the power switch; then, se-

lect the multifeeder, and press the

Copy Start key.

Pickup gear unit

2) When the pickup gear unit has moved

up as far as it can, turn off the power

switch.

3) Mount the multifeeder; then, make a

copy using the multifeeder.

Figure 5-206

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-21

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Removing the Pickup Clutch

2.1 Removing the Pickup Clutch (single-

feeder type)

1) Remove the front lower cover.

(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the

Front Lower Cover.”)

2) Remove the registration roller unit.

(See E.1.“Removing the Registration

Roller Unit.”)

3) Open the machine’s top unit, and hold it in

place using the handle of a screwdriver

(about 30 mm in diameter).

Figure 5-207

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove

the screw [2]; then, detach the solenoid

unit [3].

[1]

[2]

[3]

Figure 5-208

5-22

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5) Remove the screw [4] and the two claws

[5], and detach the gear unit [6].

[6]

[5]

[4]

[5]

Figure 5-209

[6]

6) Free the claw [7] of the gear unit [6], and

detach the clutch unit [8].

[7]

[8]

Figure 5-210

[11]

7) Remove the E-ring [9] and the washer

[10], and detach the pickup clutch [11].

[10]

[9]

Figure 5-211

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-23

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2.2 Removing the Pickup Clutch

(multifeeder type)

1) Remove the front lower cover.

(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the

Front Lower Cover.”)

2) Remove the registration roller unit.

(See E.1.“Removing the Registration

Roller Unit.”)

3) Open the machine’s top unit farther, and

hold it in place with the handle of a screw-

driver (about 30 mm in diameter).

Figure 5-212

4) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and

remove the two screws [2] then, detach

the solenoid unit [3].

[1]

[2]

[3]

Figure 5-213

5-24

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

[4]

[5]

[4]

5) While freeing the two claws [4], remove

the pickup clutch unit [5].

Figure 5-214

6) Remove the E-ring [6], and detach the

pickup clutch [7].

[7]

[6]

Figure 5-215

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-25

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3. Removing the Vertical Path Roller

1) Remove the front lower cover.

(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the

Front Lower Cover.”)

2) Open the machine’s top unit farther, and

hold it using the handle of a screwdriver

(about 30 mm in diameter).

Figure 5-216

3) Remove the screw [1], and free the two

claws [2]; then, detach the feeding assem-

bly cover [3].

[1]

[2]

[3]

Figure 5-217

5-26

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

[5]

4) While lifting the sensor lever [4], remove

the vertical path roller [5].

[4]

Figure 5-218

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-27

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

B. Multifeeder Assembly

1. Removing the Multifeeder Unit

1) Open the right door.

[1]

2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach

the multifeeder unit [2].

[2]

[1]

Figure 5-219

Caution:

When mounting the multifeeder unit,

perform the following first:

1) Turn on the power switch; then, se-

lect the multifeeder, and press the

Copy Start key.

Pickup

gear unit

2) When the pickup gear unit has moved

as far as it can, turn off the power

switch.

3) Mount the multifeeder unit; then,

make a copy using the multifeeder.

Figure 5-220

5-28

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Removing the Multifeeder Pickup

Roller

1) Remove the multifeeder unit.

(See 1. “Removing the Multifeeder

Unit.”)

2) Free the claw [1], and remove the gear [2]

and the bushing [3].

[2] [1]

[1] [3]

Figure 5-221

[4]

3) Remove the multifeeder pickup roller unit

[4].

Figure 5-222

4) While freeing the claw [5], detach the

multifeeder pickup roller [6].

[6]

[5]

Figure 5-223

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-29

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3. Removing the Separation Pad

1) Remove the multifeeder pickup roller to-

gether with its shaft.

(See 2. “Removing the Multifeeder

Pickup Roller.”)

2) Remove the multifeeder tray.

3) Slide the side guide [1] to the inside about

3 cm, and free the two claws [2]; then, de-

tach the holding plate [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

Figure 5-224

4) Push up the separation pad [4], and pull it

out by pushing the shaft [5] toward the in-

side.

[5]

[4]

[5]

Figure 5-225

5-30

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

C. Single-feeder Assembly

[2]

1. Removing the Single-feeder Unit

1) Open the right door.

[1]

2) Remove the two screws [1], and remove

the single-feeder unit [2].

[1]

Figure 5-226

2. Removing the Single-feeder

Pickup Roller

1) Remove the single-feeder unit.

(See 1. “Removing the Single-feeder

Unit.”)

2) Push up the stopper lever [1], and move

the gear [2] of the single-feeder pickup

roller assembly in the direction of the ar-

row.

[1]

[2]

Figure 5-227

3) Remove the single-feeder pickup roller

assembly [4] together with the paper

guide plate [3].

[3]

[4]

Figure 5-228

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-31

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

4) Free the claw [5] of the paper guide plate

[3], and remove the single-feeder pickup

roller [6].

[6]

[5]

[3]

Figure 5-229

5-32

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

[2]

D. Feeding Assembly

1. Detaching the Feed Belt

1) Open the machine’s top unit.

2) Push down the stopper [1], and remove

the gear [2].

[1]

Figure 5-230

3) While freeing the claw [3], detach the four

shafts [4]; then, detach the feed belt [5].

[3]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[4]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[3]

Figure 5-231

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-33

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

E. Registration Roller

Assembly

1. Removing the Registration Roller

Unit

[1]

1) Open the machine’s top unit.

2) Remove the spring [1] (front, rear).

[1]

Figure 5-232

[2]

3) Remove the two bushings [2] and remove

the registration roller lower unit [3].

[3]

[2]

Figure 5-233

5-34

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Removing the Registration Roller

Clutch

1) Remove the registration roller unit.

(See 1. “Removing the Registration

Roller Unit.”)

[1]

2) Remove the bushing [1] and the E-ring

[2].

[2]

Figure 5-234

3) While shifting down the registration roller

[3], detach it from the gear unit [4].

[4]

[3]

Figure 5-235

4) Remove the E-ring [5], and detach the

registration roller clutch [6].

Caution:

[5]

The clutch has a pin. Take care not to

lose it when removing the clutch.

[6]

Figure 5-236

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-35

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

F. Delivery Assembly

1. Removing the Delivery Roller

1) Remove the fixing lower roller.

(See Chapter 6.II.A.3.“Removing the Fix-

ing Lower Roller.”)

[3]

2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach

the side plate [2] and the four gears [3].

[3]

[2]

[1]

Figure 5-237

3) Remove the screw [4], and free the two

hooks [5]; then, detach the sensor holder

[6].

[5]

[6]

[4]

Figure 5-238

5-36

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

4) Remove the two bushings [7].

[7]

Figure 5-239

5) While shifting the delivery lower guide

[8] toward the rear, detach the delivery

roller [9].

[8]

[9]

Figure 5-240

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-37

CHAPTER 6

FIXING SYSTEM

This chapter explains the principles used to fuse toner images to transfer medium in

view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of

operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I. OPERATIONS ..............................6-1

A. Outline ...................................6-1

B. Controlling the Fixing

II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 6-10

A. Fixing Assembly ................. 6-11

Temperature ..........................6-3

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

I. OPERATIONS

A. Outline

The major functions of the fixing unit are as follows:

Item

Description

Fixing method

SURF

Fixing drive

Fixing heater

Main Motor (M1)

Flat heater

Fixing temperature

detection

Thermistor (TH1)

Cleaner

Cleaning roller

Protective functions The following are used to detect and protect against

an error; upon detection, power to the fixing heater

will be cut:

• Thermistor (TH1)

• Thermal fuse (FU2; activating at 228°C)

Error code

E000 The fixing temperature fails to increase.

E001 The thermistor has detected overheating.

E002 Fault in fixing power control.

E003 The fixing temperature has dropped

abnormally.

Table 6-101

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-1

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

Fixing film

Thermal fuse 2 (FU2)

Fixing heater (H1)

Fixing thermistor (TH1)

Fixing lower roller

Cleaning roller

Figure 6-101

DC controller PCB

Fixing film

Fixing thermistor (TH1)

Thermal fuse 2 (FU2)

Fixing heater (H1)

Main motor

Fixing lower roller

Cleaning roller

Composite power supply PCB

Figure 6-102

6-2

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

B. Controlling the Fixing Temperature

1. Outline

The fixing lower roller of the fixing assembly is driven by the main motor (M1). When the

fixing lower roller rotates, the film of the fixing upper unit starts to rotate in conjunction.

The fixing film is heated by the fixing heater (H1), which is a flat heater mounted in contact

with the inner side of the film. The fixing heater is equipped with a thermistor (TH1), which sends

the fixing thermistor signal (TH1) to the microprocessor (Q101) on the DC controller PCB; in

response, the microprocessor controls the fixing heater duty signal (HEAT_PWM) to vary the

power supplied to the heater by way of controlling the temperature of the fixing heater.

+5V

(Q101)

RLOFF*

Relay

drive signal

Auxiliary

power supply

+5V

Relay

RL601

Thermal

fuse 2

Timer

circuit

FU2

HEAT_ERR*

Fixing heater

error signal

Fixing

thermistor

Micro-

processor

Fixing heater high

temperature

error detection circuit

HEAT_OFF

TH1

Fixing heater

OFF signal

HEAT_PWM

Fixing heater

duty signal

Fixing heater

HEAT_TRG

Fixing heater

drive signal

E0_DT

E0 detection signal

Composite power

supply PCB

DC controller PCB

Figure 6-103

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-3

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

2. Controlling the Temperature of the Fixing Heater

The temperature of the fixing heater is switched according to the following two parameters:

• Temperature of the fixing heater when the Copy Start key is pressed.

• Number of copies to make in continuous copying mode

Table 6-102 shows the temperature of the fixing heater when the Copy Start key is pressed (as

detected by the thermistor TH1) and the temperatures to which the fixing heater is controlled ac-

cording to the number of copies made in continuous mode.

6-4

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

Heater temperature when the Copy Number of copies Control temperature (°C)

Start key is pressed

Less than 100°C

200

195

190

185

180

175

170

190

186

180

175

170

180

175

170

2 ~ 9

10 ~ 29

30 ~ 39

40 ~ 49

50 ~ 59

60 ~

100°C or more and less than 120°C

1 ~ 9

10 ~ 19

20 ~ 29

30 ~ 39

40 ~

1 ~ 9

10 ~ 19

20 ~

120°C or more

Table 6-102

Power switch Copy Start key

ON ON

Copy Start key

Copying end

STBY

Copying end

STBY

Copying

STBY

Copying

Main motor (M1)

Fixing heater (H1)

200

195

190

185

180

Controlling the

Temperature of

the Fixing Heater

( C)

120

100

Number of Copies in Continuous Copying Mode

after a Press on the Copy Start Key

Figure 6-104

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-5

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

3. Controlling the Temperature Supplied to the Fixing Heater

The temperature of the fixing heater is controlled by controlling the power supplied to the

fixing heater, and the power to the fixing heater is controlled using a phase control method.

The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB controls the timing at which the fixing heater

duty signal (HEAT_PWM) is generated so that power suited to the target temperature of the fixing

heater may be supplied (phase control).

HEAT_PWM

Power supplied

to the heater

Figure 6-105

4. Correcting the Variation in the Resistance of the Fixing Heater

The characteristics of the flat heater used as the fixing heater vary from heater to heater because

the production method. A discrepancy in resistance, if left alone, will not enable correct control of

the fixing heater.

The machine makes correction in relation to the selected level of resistance (from three set-

tings), and corrects it basd on the readings obtained by the microprocessor.

Caution:

The level of resistance of the fixing heater is selected by an appropriate combination of the

jumper wires connected to the connector of the fixing thermistor (TH1) and the delivery

sensor (PS3).

The best level is selected at the factory when the fixing assembly is assembled. Do not change

the combination of jumper wires.

Figure 6-106

6-6

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

5. Controlling the Power Supplied to the Fixing Heater between Sheets

When the copying speed is controlled to 6 cpm to prevent overheating of the copyboard, the

temperature of the fixing lower roller tends to increase because of the increased sheet-to-sheet

distance. To prevent possible problems, power to the fixing heater is stopped between sheets when

the copying speed is controlled to 6 cpm.

Switching to 6-cpm copying speed

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

LSTR STBY

Main motor (M1)

Registration clutch

solenoid (SL2)

Heater OFF

Delivery sensor (PS3)

Fixing heater (H1)

Scanner

Heater ON

Forward

Reverse

Figure 6-107

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-7

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6. Protective Functions

The machine is equipped with the following protective functions to prevent malfunction of the

fixing heater.

a. Thermistor (TH1)

The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB monitors the voltage of the thermistor (TH1); if

an abnormally high or low temperature is detected, the microprocessor sends the fixing heater error

signal (HEAT_ERR*) to the timer circuit and, at the same time, indicate an error code (E000

through E003).

In response, the timer circuit sends the relay drive signal (RLOFF*) to the auxiliary power

supply in about 1.2 sec after it hs received the fixing heater error signal (HEAT_ERR*).

The auxiliary power supply turns off the relay (RL601) to turn off the power. Then, the data of

‘E0’ (associated with the heater) is retained so as to indicate ‘E0’ when the power is turned on the

next time.

‘E0’ is backed up for about 5 min. After ‘E000’ through ‘E003’ is indicated in the control panel

and the power is turned off, the machine will indicate ‘E0’ in the control panel if the power switch

is turned on within 5 min, not recognizing a press on the Copy Start key. If the Copy Start key is

pressed after about 5 min, however, a press on the Copy Start key will be recognized.

If an error is detected in relation to the heater during copying operation, the machine will

indicate ‘E000’ through ‘E003’ in the control panel once again and turn off the power.

Related Error Code

E000

• The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is not 65°C in 1.5 sec after the Copy

Start key is pressed.

• The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is not 150°C in 4 sec after the Copy

Start key is pressed.

E001

• The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is 230°C or more.

• The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is higher than the control temperature

by 30°C or more.

• The thermistor (TH1) has detected an increase in temperature of 100°C or more in 1 sec.

• The thermistor (TH1) has detected an increase in temperature of 40°C or more after it

detected 100°C in standby state.

• E0 detection signal (E0_DT) has been detected twice in succession.

E002

The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is 150°C or higher and, thereafter, maxi-

mum power has been supplied to the fixing heater for 10 to 14 sec during copying operation.

E003

The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is 160°C and then 150°C or lower during

copying operation.

6-8

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

b. Thermal Fuse (FU2)

If the temperature around the thermal fuse exceeds 228°C and remains so for a specific period

of time, the thermal fuse will blow to cut the power to the fixing heater.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-9

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:

Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for

safety.

2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble

it.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varis-

tors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)

5. As necessary, cut the harness band.

6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.

7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any

screws indiscriminately.

6-10

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

A. Fixing Assembly

1. Construction

Caution:

1. The fixing film is made from a spe-

cial material. Do not touch it or sub-

ject it to dust.

[1]

[2]

2. The machine does not have a mecha-

nism used to adjust the roller pres-

sure.

[5]

[4]

[3]

[1] Fixing heater

[2] Fixing film

[3] Inlet guide

[4] Fixing lower roller

[5] Cleaning roller

Figure 6-201

2. Removing the Fixing Assembly

1) Remove the front lower cover.

(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the

Front Lower Cover.”)

[1]

[2]

2) Remove the screw [1], and free the two

hooks [2]; then, detach the power supply

cover [3].

[3]

Figure 6-202

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-11

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

3) Remove the screw [4], and disconnect the

connector [5].

[5]

[4]

Figure 6-203

4) Remove the two screws [6], and discon-

nect the connector [7]; then, detach the

fixing assembly [8] by turning it in the di-

rection of the arrow.

[6]

[8]

[7]

Figure 6-204

6-12

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

3. Removing the Fixing Lower Roller

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

(See 2. “Removing the Fixing Assem-

bly.”)

2) Remove the two screws [1], and free the

two hooks [2]; then, detach the fixing up-

per stay [3] by turning it in the direction of

the arrow.

[2]

[3]

[1]

[2]

Figure 6-205

3) Detach the harness band [4] from the side

plate, and remove the fixing upper unit

[5].

[5]

Caution:

Do not disassemble the fixing film and

the fixing heater. They cannot be re-

placed on their own.

[4]

Figure 6-206

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-13

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

4) Remove the fixing lower roller [6] to-

gether with the gear.

[6]

Figure 6-207

4. Removing the Cleaning Roller

1) Remove the fixing lower roller.

(See 3. “Removing the Fixing Lower

Roller.”)

[1]

2) Remove the cleaning roller [1] together

with the bushing.

Figure 6-208

6-14

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7

EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

This chapter shows the machine's external parts, and explains the principles used for

the machine's various control mechanisms in view of the functions of electrical and

mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units

may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I. FANS ............................................7-1

II. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM .........7-3

A. Outline of the Power Supply

System ..................................7-3

B. Power Supply Circuit .............7-4

C. Detecting an Error on

III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ........7-7

A. External Covers.....................7-8

B. Control Panel...................... 7-15

C. Copyboard Glass ............... 7-16

D. Main Motor/Main Drive

Assembly............................ 7-17

E. Electrical System ............... 7-21

the Composite Power Supply

PCB .......................................7-6

D. Protecting the Power Supply

Circuit ....................................7-6

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

I. FANS

The machine is equipped with two fans serving to discharge ozone or cool its inside.

The heat exhaust fan is driven directly by the main motor (M1; through a belt and a gear), and

is designed to rotate at all times while the main motor is rotating.

Heat exhausting fan

FM1

Figure 7-101

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-1

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

The scanner cooling fan (FM1) is turned on and off according to the temperature detected by

the scanner thermistor (TH2).

If the reading by the thermistor is 37.5°C or higher and the copying speed reaches 6 cpm, the

fan starts to rotate. If the reading is lower than 37.5°C, on the other hand, the fan will not rotate if

no more than one copy is made or while making the first copy of a continuous copying job. (It

rotates when making the second and subsequent copies of a continuous copying job.)

Power switch Copy Start key

ON ON

STBY INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV LSTR STBY

Main motor (M1)

Scanner cooling fan (FM1)

Heat exhausting fan

Scanner

Forward

Reverse

I: If 6-cpm copying speed control is executed starting with the first copy, the fan will rotate.

Figure 7-102

7-2

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

II. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

A. Outline of the Power Supply System

Door switch

Composite power

supply circuit

Noise

filter

DS1

circuit

Power

plug

Auxiliary

power

supply

circuit

Trans-

former

Relay

RL601

T600

+5V

Control panel

AE sensor

Sensor

Micro-

processor

(Q900)

+24VR

+5V

FU102

To ADF

+24VU

controller

PCB

Solenoid

Scanner/lens

drive motor (M2)

+5V

Scanner cooling fan

+24VU

+24VR

Blanking lamp

Main motor/

main motor

driver PCB

power

supply

circuit

+24VU

Main

transformer

Fixing

heater

control

circuit

Fixing heater

T101

Scanning

lamp

control

circuit

Scanning lamp

Primary charging

roller

High-

voltage

power

supply

circuit

Developing roller

Transfer roller

Static eliminator

Figure 7-201

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-3

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

B. Power Supply Circuit

The machine’s power supply consists of a composite power supply circuit in which a DC

power supply, scanning lamp power supply, and high-voltage power supply are integrated on a

single board. It also possesses a microprocessor for exchanges of various data with the machine's

DC controller PCB.

The machine’s power switch is a soft switch, and the machine is equipped with an auxiliary

power supply used to operate the switch. The auxiliary power supply provides the microprocessor

(Q900) with +5 V as long as the door switch (DS1) remains on.

AC power is supplied to the DC power supply when the power switch on the control panel is

turned on. In response, the DC power supply provides the DC controller PCB with +5 V, +24 VR,

and +24 VU.

When the power switch is turned off, the power to the DC controller PCB is cut off. To back it

up against ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, and ‘E003’, the machine is equipped with a DC capacitor as part

of the DC controller circuit.

When ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, or ‘E003’ occurs, the capacitor (C123) collects electric charge;

if charge exists in the capacitor while the power switch is on, the machine indicates ‘E0’ on the

control panel to indicate that an error related to the fixing heater has occurred.

Note:

The backup capacitor (C123) retains electric charge for about 5 min after the power switch is

turned off.

Reference:

The tolerances in DC voltage are as follows:

• +5 V ±5%

• +24 VR ±5%

• +24 VU -10.0%, +12.5%

For +24 VR, two types of voltage are used:

• During copying, +24 V ±5%

• During standby, +18 V ±10%

However, the above assume that the deviations in AC input are -15%, +10%.

7-4

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

Door switch

DS1

Relay

RL601

+5V

power

supply

+24VR

+24VU

FU102

Main

transfor-

mer

Auxiliary

power

supply

T101

+5V

Microprocessor

(Q900)

Power

switch

SW309

C123

Control panel

Power supply

DC controller PCB

Figure 7-202

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-5

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

C. Detecting an Error on the Composite Power Supply PCB

The machine’s composite power supply PCB is equipped with a self diagnostic function to

check each power output and the communication with the DC controller PCB using the micropro-

cessor (Q900) mounted on it.

If any of the following errors occurs, the microprocessor will exchange signals with the DC

controller PCB, and will indicate the result of self diagnosis on the control panel.

1. Detecting an Over-Current in the Low-Voltage System

If an over-current is detected because of a fault in a DC load, the composite power supply PCB

will turn off the relay (RL601) to cut the AC input.

2. Detecting a Fault in the High-Voltage Control Value

If a deviation is found between the setting value and the actual value is detected in any of the

following voltages, the composite power supply will indicate ‘E064’ on the control panel.

• Primary charging DC bias

• Developing DC bias

• Transfer bias

3. Detecting a Fault in the Low-Voltage Control Value

If a deviation is detected between the setting value and the actual control value in +24 V (DC

output), the composite power supply PCB will indicate ‘E803’ on the control panel.

4. Fault in the Communication with the DC Controller

If the DC controller PCB detects a fault in the communication with the composite power sup-

ply PCB, ‘E240’ will be indicated on the control panel for about 4 sec, and then the relay (RL601)

will be turned off to cut the AC input.

D. Protecting the Power Supply Circuit

The composite power supply PCB is equipped with an over-current detection function which

turns on a protective mechanism to stop output if a load suffers a short-circuit.

If the output has stopped, it may be reset by opening the machine’s top unit, correcting the load,

and then turning the power switch back on.

Keep in mind, however, that repeated short-circuiting and resetting can blow the fuse (FU102).

7-6

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:

Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for

safety.

2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble

it.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varis-

tors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)

5. As necessary, cut the harness band.

6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.

7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any

screws indiscriminately.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-7

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

A. External Covers

For instructions on how to remove the

ADF, see Chapter 8.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[7]

[6]

[5]

[1] Copyboard cover [5] Cassette

[2] Top cover

[3] Control panel

[4] Front lower cover

[6] Front upper cover

[7] Left cover

Figure 7-301 (Copyboard type)

7-8

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[7]

[6]

[5]

[1] ADF

[5] Cassette

[2] Top cover

[3] Control panel

[6] Front upper cover

[7] Left cover

[4] Front lower cover

Figure 7-302 (ADF type)

Note:

Remove the covers as necessary when

[1]

cleaning, inspecting, or repairing the in-

side of the machine.

Those covers that may be detached from

their own by mere removal of mounting

screws are omitted from the discussions.

[3]

[2]

[1] Rear cover

[2] Right door

[3] Multifeeder unit

Figure 7-303

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-9

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

1. Removing the Top Cover

1) Remove the copyboard cover or the ADF.

2) Open the machine’s top unit.

3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach

the front upper cover [2].

[1]

Caution:

A flexible cable for the control panel is

connected to the front upper cover. Dis-

connect the cable from the DC control-

ler.

[2]

[1]

Figure 7-304

4) Free the two claws [3], and slide the left

cover [4] to detach.

[4]

[3]

Figure 7-305

7-10

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

[7]

5) Remove the screw [5], and free the four

claws [6]; then, detach the rear cover [7].

[6]

[5]

Figure 7-306

6) Remove the screw [8], and detach the

copyboard cover foot retainer [9].

[8]

[9]

Figure 7-307

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-11

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

7) Free the two claw [10]; then lift the top

cover [11] to detach.

[10]

[11]

Figure 7-308

7-12

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2. Removing the Front Lower Cover

1) Open the right door.

2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach

the multifeeder unit [2] (or the single-

feeder unit).

[1]

[2]

[1]

Figure 7-309

3) Open the machine’s top unit.

4) Remove the two screws [3], and detach

the front upper cover [4].

[3]

Caution:

A flexible cable for the control panel is

connected to the front upper cover. Dis-

connect the cable from the DC control-

ler.

[4]

[3]

Figure 7-310

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-13

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

[5]

5) Remove the two screws [5] from the

screw plate found at the bottom of the ma-

chine.

Figure 7-311

[6]

6) While freeing the five claws [6], detach

the front lower cover [7].

[7]

[6]

Figure 7-312

Caution:

When mounting the multifeeder unit, be

sure to perform the following first:

1) Turn on the power switch; then, se-

lect the multifeeder as the source of

paper, and press the Copy Start key.

2) When the pickup gear unit assembly

has moved to its upper limit, turn off

the power switch.

Pickup

gear unit

3) Mount the multifeeder, and make one

copy using it as the source of paper.

Figure 7-313

7-14

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

B. Control Panel

1. Removing the Control Panel

1) Open the machine’s top unit.

2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach

the front upper cover [2].

[1]

Caution:

A flexible cable for the control panel is

connected to the front upper cover. Dis-

connect the cable from the DC control-

ler.

[2]

[1]

Figure 7-314

3) Free the claw [3], and remove the power

supply switch assembly [4]. Move the

copy density adjusting lever [5] to the far-

thest right, and free the four claws [6];

then, detach the control panel [7].

[6]

[4]

Move to the right

Lighter

Darker

[3]

Auto Exposure

Manual Exposure

Photo

[7]

Timer Saver

[5]

Figure 7-315

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-15

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

C. Copyboard Glass

1. Removing the Copyboard Glass

1) Remove the top cover. (See A.1. “Remov-

ing the Top Cover.”)

2) Close the machine’s top unit.

3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach

the two support plates [2]; then, detach the

copyboard glass [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

Figure 7-316

Copyboard glass

Note:

When mounting the copyboard glass, be

sure that the grounding plate is on the

side of its top edge. (ADF type only)

Grounding plate

Figure 7-317

7-16

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

D. Main Motor/Main Drive

Assembly

1. Removing the Main Motor Unit

1) Remove the drum cartridge.

2) Remove the composite power supply

PCB.

(See E.2. “Removing the Composite

Power Supply PCB.”)

3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the

high-voltage PCB [2].

[1]

[2]

Figure 7-318

4) Remove the insulating sheet [3].

[3]

Figure 7-319

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-17

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

5) Detach the fan belt [4].

[4]

Figure 7-320

6) Remove the four screws [5], and detach

the main motor unit [6].

[5]

Caution:

When installing the main motor unit, be

sure to attach the fan belt.

After attaching the fan belt, make sure

that the belt is free of twists.

[5]

[6]

Figure 7-321

7-18

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2. Removing the Main Drive Assem-

bly

1) Remove the drum cartridge.

2) Remove the composite power supply

PCB.

(See E.2. “Removing the Composite

Power Supply PCB.”)

3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the

high-voltage PCB [2].

[1]

[2]

Figure 7-322

4) Remove the insulating sheet [3].

[3]

Figure 7-323

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-19

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

5) Detach the fan belt [4].

[4]

Figure 7-324

6) Remove the five screws [5], and detach

the main drive assembly [6].

[6]

[5]

Caution:

When installing the main drive assem-

bly, be sure to attach the fan belt.

After attaching the fan belt, make sure

that the belt is free of twists.

[5]

Figure 7-325

7-20

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

E. Electrical System

1. Removing the DC Controller PCB

1) Open the machine’s top unit.

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the

front upper cover [2].

[1]

Caution:

A flexible cable for the control panel is

connected to the front upper cover. Dis-

connect the cable from the DC control-

ler.

[2]

[1]

Figure 7-326

3) Disconnect all connectors from the DC

controller PCB, remove the screw [3], and

free the six claws [4]; then, detach the DC

controller PCB [5].

[3]

[4]

[5]

[4]

Figure 7-327

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-21

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2. Removing the Composite Power

Supply PCB

1) Remove the copyboard cover or the ADF.

2) Remove the left cover and the rear cover.

3) Remove the screw [1], and remove the

copyboard cover foot retainer [2].

[1]

[2]

Figure 7-328

4) Disconnect the ten connectors [3] from

the composite power supply PCB, and

disconnect the connector [4] from the

main motor assembly.

[3]

[4]

Figure 7-329

7-22

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

5) Remove the seven screws [5], and free the

[6]

five claws [6]; then, detach the composite

power supply PCB [7].

[5]

[7]

Figure 7-330

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-23

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

3. Points to Note When Handling the

Composite Power Supply PCB

1) Some capacitors on the composite power

supply hold charges when the machine’s

power supply is off.

Take extra care never to short the termi-

nals of the capacitor whenever you have

removed the composite power supply

PCB.

2) When handling the PCB, hold its heat ra-

diating plate (at the center) or its both

edges. In particular, keep in mind that

holding the area indicated by “

” can

cause deformation or cracking of the

board.

Figure 7-331

7-24

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8

ADF

I. ADF ..............................................8-1

A. Outline ...................................8-1

Basic Construction ................8-2

H. Controlling the Belt Motor .. 8-15

I. Detecting Original Jams ..... 8-16

J. Power Supply ..................... 8-17

II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 8-18

A. Removing the ADF............. 8-19

B. External Covers.................. 8-21

C. Drive System ...................... 8-23

D. Feeding System ................. 8-26

E. Electrical System ............... 8-33

C. Basic Operations...................8-4

D. Detecting an Original ............8-6

E. Pickup Operation...................8-8

F. Delivery .............................. 8-12

G. Controlling the Pickup

Motor .................................. 8-14

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

I. ADF

A. Outline

The ADF picks up the originals stacked on the original tray starting with the topmost original,

moves them through the copyboard, and delivers them.

See Figure 8-101 for an outline of the feeding route.

Original tray

ADF

Copier

Figure 8-101

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-1

CHAPTER 8 ADF

Basic Construction

1. Outline of the Electric Circuitry

The ADF’s major electrical mechanisms are controlled by the CPU on the ADF controller

PCB.

The CPU on the ADF controller PCB reads the signals from the sensors and the copier and

generates signals to drive the motor at such times as programmed in advance.

The copying modes selected on the copier are communicated to the ADF in serial, and the ADF

communicates to the copier the state of feeding originals to the copier in serial. (It does not use an

IC for communications.)

[Input block]

[Control block]

[Output block]

ADFcontroller PCB

Sensor

Motor

CPU

(Q1)

ROM

(Q2)

Switch

24V

Serial communication

Composite

power

supply

PCB

Copier

Figure 8-102

8-2

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

2. Inputs to and Outputs from the ADF Controller PCB

a. Inputs to and Outputs from the ADF Controller PCB (1/1)

ADF controller PCB

+24V

ADF switch

J6-1

-2

MS1

ADFC

When ADF is opened, '1'.

+5V

J5-1

-3

Delivery sensor

PDP1

When original is detected, '1'.

-2

(when light-blocking plate is at sensor)

PI1

+5V

J105

J5-4

-6

Registration paper

sensor

PDP2

When original is detected, '0'.

(when light-blocking plate is at sensor)

-5

PI2

+5V

J5-7

-9

Original placement

sensor

PDP3

When original is detected, '0'.

-8

PI3

(when light-blocking plate is at sensor)

Belt motor

J3-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

See p. 8-15.

See p. 8-14.

Pickup motor

J3-6

-7

J114

J202

Serial communication

*Negative logic.

Copier

Figure 8-103

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-3

CHAPTER 8 ADF

C. Basic Operations

1. Outline

The ADF uses two motors for picking up and delivering originals. The pickup motor (M2) is

used to pick up originals, and the belt motor (M1) is used to move, stop, and deliver originals.

Further, the ADF is equipped with three sensors for monitoring the movement of originals.

The ADF is designed to accommodate one-sided original copying mode only.

ADF controller PCB

One-way

clutch

PI1

PI3

PI2

Figure 8-104

8-4

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

2. One-Sided Original Mode

The ADF picks up originals stacked on the original tray starting with the topmost original; after

it picks up an original, it places it on the copyboard glass for copying, moves it away from the

copyboard glass, and delivers it to the copyboard glass.

Delivery tray Originals

Original tray

Placing originals

Picking up an original

Feeding 1

Feeding 2

Copying

Delivering

Figure 8-105

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-5

CHAPTER 8 ADF

D. Detecting an Original

1. Outline

The ADF’s original detection mechanism has the following two functions:

1. Detecting the Presence/Absence of an Original

Checks whether there is an original on the original tray.

2. Identifying the Length of the Original

Checks the length of the original placed on the original tray.

3. Detecting the Presence/Absence of an Original

The original placement sensor (PI3) is used to check the presence/absence of an original.

When an original is placed on the original tray, the original placement sensor (PI3) sends the

original detection signal (PDP3) to the ADF controller PCB in response to the movement of the

detecting lever away from the sensor.

Original

Original tray

Detecting lever

PI3

ADF controller PCB

Figure 8-106

8-6

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

2. Identifying the Length of the Original

The registration paper sensor (PI2) is used to identify the length of the original, if any.

The ADF controller computes the length of the original based on the time it takes for the

original to move past the registration paper sensor (PI2).

Using the result of the computation, the ADF controller determines whether the size of the

original is A4/LTR or smaller or LGL, thereby switching to the appropriate ADF operation.

Table 8-101 shows the lengths of originals that determines ADF operation sequence.

Original

Original tray

PI3

PI2

ADF controller PCB

Figure 8-107

Original Lengths and Operation Sequences

Length

Sequence

For A4/LTR originals

For LGL originals

~313cm

314cm~

Table 8-101

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-7

CHAPTER 8 ADF

E. Pickup Operation

1. Operation

When an original is placed on the original tray and the Copy Start key is pressed, the following

sequence of operations takes place:

Preparing for PickUp Operation

When an original is placed on the original tray, i.e., the original placement sensor (PI3) turns

ON, the pickup roller rotates counterclockwise and the paper guide holds the original in place.

1st original

Original tray

PI3

Paper guide

Figure 8-108

Pickup Separation

When the Copy Start key is pressed, the pickup roller 1 and 2 rotate clockwise, and pick up the

first original (topmost) and forward it as far as the registration roller. (The separation pad ensures

that only one original is picked up.)

Pickup roller 1

Pickup roller 2

1st original

Separation pad

Registration roller

Figure 8-109

8-8

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

Arching

The first original is butted against the registration roller so that it arches.

1st original

Arching

Registration roller

Figure 8-110

Feeding Operation 1

The feeding belt is moved so that the leading edge of the first original comes into contact with

the delivery sensor (PI1). (In the case of a LGL original, the original is moved about 15 mm farther

after it has come into contact with the delivery sensor.)

At the same time, the pickup motor (M2) is rotated counterclockwise to prepare for picking up

the second original.

Delivery sensor

PI1

Feeding belt

2nd original

1st original

Figure 8-111

Original tray

PI3

Paper guide

Figure 8-112

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-9

CHAPTER 8 ADF

Feeding 2

The feeding belt is moved counterclockwise so that the first original is stopped at a specific

location on the copyboard glass.

Feeding belt

1st original

Figure 8-113

Moving the Scanner and Picking Up the Second Original

The scanner starts to move forward after the original has been stopped at a specific location on

the copyboard glass.

If the original is A4/LTR or smaller, the pickup motor (M2) is also rotated clockwise to pickup

the second original and butt it against the registration roller.

If the original is LGL, the second original is picked up after the scanner has been moved for-

ward.

1st original

2nd original

Scanner

Figure 8-114

8-10

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

2. Sequence of Pickup Operations (A4/LTR, 2 originals)

Original set

Copy Start key ON

Copying

Pickig up

Preparing for Picking up

Picking up

Feeding 1

Feeding 2

pickup

/separating

2nd original

Preparing for pickup

of 2nd original

Arching

Pickup motor (M2)

Belt motor (M1)

Original detection

sensor (PI3)

Registration sensor (PI2)

Delivery sensor (PI1)

: motor CCW rotation

Figure 8-115

3. Sequence of Operations (LGL, 2 originals)

Original set

Copy Start key ON

Copying

Pickig up

Feeding 1

Preparing for Picking up

Feeding 2

pickup

/separating

Preparing for pickup

of 2nd original

Arching

Pickup motor (M2)

Belt motor (M1)

Original detection

sensor (PI3)

Registration sensor (PI2)

Delivery sensor (PI1)

Feeding 15mm farther

: motor CCW rotation

Figure 8-116

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-11

CHAPTER 8 ADF

F. Delivery

1. Operations

The ADF operates as follows to deliver originals from the copyboard glass:

Delivery Feeding

The feeding belt is moved to feed and deliver the first original on the copyboard glass. At the

same time, the pickup motor (M2) moves the second original to the copyboard glass.

1st original

2nd original

Figure 8-117

Delivering to the Delivery Tray

The ADF switches the belt motor to low speed as soon as the trailing edge of the original

moves past the delivery sensor (PI1), thereby delivering the original slowly.

1st original

Delivery tray

Delivery sensor

2nd original

Figure 8-118

8-12

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

2. Sequence of Operations (A4/LTR, 2 originals)

Original set

Copy Start key ON

Picking up

/separating 1st original

^{Copying,picking}Delivering 1st original/

up/separating

2nd original

Copying Delivering

picking up 2nd original

Pickup motor (M2)

Belt motor (M1)

Original detection

sensor (PI3)

Detecting length

Registration sensor (PI2)

Delivery sensor (PI1)

: motor CCW rotation

: motor low-speed rotation

Figure 8-119

3. Sequence of Operations (LGL, 2 originals)

Original set

Copy Start key ON

Delivering 1st original,

picking up/separating

2nd original

Copying

Copying Delivering

Pickup motor (M2)

Belt motor (M1)

Original detection

sensor (PI3)

Registration sensor (PI2)

Feeding farther 15mm Feeding farther 15mm

Feeding farther 15mm

Delivery sensor (PI1)

: motor CCW rotation

: motor low-speed rotation

Figure 8-120

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-13

CHAPTER 8 ADF

G. Controlling the Pickup Motor

1. Outline

Figure 8-121 is a diagram of the control circuit for the pickup motor (M2).

The pickup motor is a DC motor.

The CPU (Q1) on the ADF controller PCB sends the motor drive signals PM0 and PM1 to the

motor driver (Q5). The pickup motor rotates clockwise or counterclockwise according to the com-

binations of the states of these two signals. (Table 8-102 shows how the pickup motor rotates for

each combination.)

The motor driver is equipped with a limiter function, preventing overcurrent from flowing into

the motor. When an overcurrent occurs, the limiter function cuts off the motor drive current,

thereby preventing damage to the motor.

When the limiter function is activated, the pickup motor cannot rotate as controlled, possibly

leading to pickup faults. Any pickup fault causes the ADF controller to flash the JAM indicator on

the copier and stop the pickup motor at the same time.

ADF controller PCB

+24V

Pickup

motor

PM1

PM0

Motor

driver

PMRD1

PMRD1*

CPU

Figure 8-121

Motor drive

Pickup roller

signal (PM0)

signal (PM1)

rotation

Braked

Picking up

Delivering

At reset (free)

‘1’

‘0’

‘1’

‘0’

‘1’

‘0’

Table 8-102

8-14

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

H. Controlling the Belt Motor

1. Outline

Figure 8-122 is a diagram showing the control circuit for the belt motor (M2).

The belt motor is a 4-phase control stepping motor.

The CPU (Q1) on the ADF controller PCB sends control pulse signals (A, A*, B, B*) to the

motor driver (Q4).

In response, the motor driver changes the output timing of the pulse signals (MA, MA*, MB,

MB*) used for driving the motor to rotate the belt motor clockwise or counterclockwise.

The motor driver is equipped with a limiter function used to keep the motor supplied with a

specific current so that current greater than specified will not flow.

If loads large enough to activate the limiter function occur in succession, the belt motor cannot

rotate as specified, possibly leading to feeding faults. Any feeding fault will cause the ADF con-

troller to flash the Jam indicator on the controller and stop the belt motor at the same time.

ADF controller PCB

+24V

Belt motor

CPU

Motor

driver

MA*

MB*

Figure 8-122

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-15

CHAPTER 8 ADF

Detecting Original Jams

The ADF is equipped with three jam sensors (PI1 through PI3) as indicated in Figure 8-123 to

monitor the movement of originals.

The movement of originals are checked at such times as programmed in the CPU on the ADF

controller PCB; a jam is identified in relation to the presence of an original at each sensor.

Table 8-103 describes the type of jam, condition of detection, and sensors involved.

PI1

PI3

PI2

PI3: original placement sensor

PI1: delivery sensor

PI2: registration sensor

Figure 8-123

Type of Original Jam and Condition of Detection

Operation

Type of jam

Sensor

Conditions

Residual original

PI1,PI2

When the 1st original is separated, the delivery

sensor (PI1) turns on while the belt motor

rotates for 300 ms or less or before the registra-

tion sensor (PI2) turns on.

When the 1st original is picked up, the registra-

tion sensor (PI2) and the delivery sensor (PI1)

turn on.

When separation starts, the registration sensor

(PI2) or the delivery sensor (PI1) are on.

When separation starts, the registration sensor

(PI2) does not turn on after 2 sec.

When pickup starts, the registration sensor (PI2)

does not turn off after feeding the original for

about 500 mm.

Pickup

Original present at start

Separation delay

Pick-up delay

PI1,PI2

PI2

ADF open

Delivery delay jam

MS1

PI1,PI2

The ADF is opened while in operation.

When delivery starts, the delivery sensor (PI1)

does not detect an original that has been fed

about 100 mm.

After the registration sensor (PI2) has turned

off, the delivery sensor (PI1) does not detect an

original that has been fed for about 500 mm.

During pickup, the delivery sensor (PI1) re-

mains on even when the original is fed for

‘length + about 60 mm’.

Delivery

Delivery stationary jam

PI1

Table 8-103

8-16

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

J. Power Supply

1. Outline

Figure 8-124 shows the routes of power supply.

The ADF is supplied by the copier with 5 V and 24 V. The 24V supply is cut off when the ADF

is opened, i.e., when the ADF switch (MS1) turns off. The 5V supply will continue to keep each

sensor powered even when the ADF is opened.

ADF switch

(MS1)

Belt motor (M1)

J1-1

J1-3

24V

J101-1

J101-3

Pickup motor (M2)

Circuitbreaker

(CB1)

Composite

power

supply

PCB

Delivery sensor (PI1)

Fuse resistor

(R1)

Registration sensor (PI2)

Original placement sensor (PI3)

Logic

ADF controller PCB

Copier

Figure 8-124

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-17

CHAPTER 8 ADF

II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:

Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for

safety.

2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble

it.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varis-

tors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)

5. As necessary, cut the harness band.

6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.

7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any

screws indiscriminately.

8-18

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800S/900S REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

A. Removing the ADF

1) Open the machine’s top unit.

2) Free the two claws [1], and slide the left

cover [2] to detach.

[2]

[1]

Figure 8-201

3) Remove the screw [3], and free the four

claws [4]; then, the detach the rear cover

[5].

[5]

[4]

[3]

Figure 8-202

4) Close the machine’s top unit.

5) Remove the two screws [6], and remove

the fixing plate [7].

[6]

[7]

Figure 8-203

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-19

CHAPTER 8 ADF

[8]

6) Disconnect the two connectors [8], and

remove the screw [9]; then, remove the

cable bush [10].

[10]

[9]

[8]

Figure 8-204

7) Remove the two lockpin [11], and remove

the ADF from the copier.

[11]

Figure 8-205

8-20

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

[1]

B. External Covers

[2]

[1] Upper cover

[2] Lower cover

Figure 8-206

Remove the covers as follows when

cleaning, checking, or repairing the inside of

the machine:

1) Remove the ADF from the copier.

(See “A. Removing the ADF.”)

2) Remove the feeding roller [1] from the

bushing [2].

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

Figure 8-207

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-21

CHAPTER 8 ADF

[3]

3) Remove the six screws [3], and separate

the lower cover [4] from the upper cover

[5].

[3]

[4]

[3]

[5]

Figure 8-208

4) Disconnect the connector [6], and remove

the lower cover [4].

[4]

[6]

Figure 8-209

8-22

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

C. Drive System

1. Drive Unit

1) Remove the lower cover.

(See “B. External Covers.”)

2) Remove the screw [1] and the bushing [2];

then, remove the pickup roller cover [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

Figure 8-210

3) Remove the E-ring [4], and remove the

bearing [5].

[5]

[4]

Figure 8-211

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-23

CHAPTER 8 ADF

[6]

4) Remove the timing belt [6], and remove

the feeding belt roller [7] by shifting it in

the direction of the arrow.

[7]

Figure 8-212

[9]

5) Remove the five screws [9], and remove

the right hinge unit [8].

[9]

Figure 8-213

6) Remove the stop ring [10] (resin) and the

bushing [11].

[11]

[10]

Figure 8-214

8-24

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

7) Disconnect the two connectors [12], and

remove the five screws [13]; then, remove

the drive unit [14].

[13]

[14]

[13]

[12]

Figure 8-215

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-25

CHAPTER 8 ADF

D. Feeding System

1. Pickup Roller

[1]

1) Remove the drive unit [1].

(See “C.1. Drive Unit.”)

Figure 8-216

[4]

2) Remove the E-ring [2], and remove the

shaft [3]; then, detach the pickup roller 1

[4].

[3]

[2]

Figure 8-217

3) Remove the stop ring [5].

[5]

Figure 8-218

8-26

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

[7]

4) Remove the two straight pins [6], and re-

move the pickup roller 2 [8] while moving

the cover [7] in the direction of the arrow.

[8]

[6]

Figure 8-219

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-27

CHAPTER 8 ADF

2. Registration Roller

1) Remove the lower cover.

(See “B. External Covers.”)

2) Remove the link arm [1] from the registra-

tion roller shaft [2] by turning the link

arm.

[2]

[1]

Figure 8-220

3) While pushing the bushing [3] in the di-

rection of the arrow, pull out the registra-

tion roller shaft [2] slowly.

[2]

[3]

Figure 8-221

8-28

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

3. Feeding Belt

1) Remove the lower cover.

(See “B. External Covers.”)

2) Remove the two tension springs [1].

[1]

Figure 8-222

3) Remove the E-ring [2], and remove the

bearing [3].

[3]

[2]

Figure 8-223

[4]

4) Remove the timing belt [4], and remove

the feeding belt drive roller [5] by moving

it in the direction of the arrow.

[5]

Figure 8-224

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-29

CHAPTER 8 ADF

[6]

5) Remove the two equalizer spring [6] and

the two feeding belt rolls [7].

[7]

[6]

[7]

Figure 8-225

6) Remove the two screws [9], and remove

the delivery sensor unit [8].

[9] [8]

Figure 8-226

7) Remove the stop ring [10] (made of

resin); then, remove the bushing [11].

[10]

[11]

Figure 8-227

8-30

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

8) Remove the screw [12], and remove the

grounding wire [13]; then, remove the de-

livery roller unit [14] by moving it in the

direction of the arrow.

[14]

[12]

[13]

Figure 8-228

9) Remove the screw [15], and remove the

static eliminating brush [16].

[16]

[15]

Figure 8-229

10) Remove the two E-rings [17]; then, re-

move the timing belt [18], gear [19], and

two bushings [20].

[20]

[17]

[20]

[19]

[17]

[18]

Figure 8-230

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-31

CHAPTER 8 ADF

11) Pull out the actuator [21] in the direction

of the arrow; then, remove the feeding belt

link roller [22], and remove the feeding

belt [23].

[23]

[21]

[22]

Figure 8-231

8-32

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 ADF

E. Electrical System

1. ADF Controller PCB

1) Remove the lower cover.

(See “B. External Covers.”)

2) Disconnect the five connectors [1], and

remove the two screws [2]; then, remove

the ADF controller PCB [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Figure 8-232

2. Original Placement Sensor and

Registration Paper Sensor

Pay attention to the colors of the cables

and connectors when connecting the connec-

tors of the original placement sensor and the

registration paper sensor.

Original

placement

sensor

Sensor

Cable color

Original placement sensor

Registration paper sensor

Purple

Yellow

Table 8-201

Registration

paper sensor

Figure 8-233

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-33

CHAPTER 9

INSTALLATION

I. SELECTING A SITE ....................9-1

II. UNPACKING AND

B. Placing Copy Paper...............9-9

III. MOVING THE MACHINE .......... 9-12

INSTALLATION ............................9-2

A. Unpacking and Installation....9-2

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

I. SELECTING A SITE

Keep the following in mind when selecting a site for installation; if possible, visit the user’s

before delivery of the machine:

• The site offers a power outlet whose rating is as specified (±10%) and which may be used

exclusively for the machine.

• The site is between 7.5°C/45.5°F and 32.5°C/90.5°F in temperature and between 5% and

85% in humidity. Avoid an area near water faucets, water boilers, humidifiers, and refrigera-

tors.

• Avoid areas near sources of fire. The site must not be subject to ammonium gas or direct rays

of the sun. (As necessary, provide curtains.)

• The site must be well ventilated.

The level of ozone generated by the machine should not affect the health of people around it.

Some, however, may find the odor to be rather unpleasant, and ventilation is a very important

factor.

• The floor of the site must ensure that the machine’s feet will remain in contact, and will hold

the machine level.

• The machine must be at least 10 cm/3.9 in. away from any wall, and there must be adequate

space for work involving the machine.

10cm min.

Figure 9-101

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-1

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

When a piece of metal is brought in from a cold to warm place, droplets of water tend to form

on its surface. This phenomenon is known as “condensation” and, in copiers, can cause blank

copies.

If the machine has been brought in from a cold place, leave it alone at least for one hour before

starting to install it.

A. Unpacking and Installation

Step

Work

Checks and remarks

Take out the copier and the attachments from • Cassette

the shipping box, and check to make sure that

none is missing:

• Copy tray

• Power cord

• ADF auxiliary tray (ADF type only)

• User's Manual

• Manual feed tray (for some areas only)

• Language label for cassette (included with

universal cassette)

• Language label for ADF (ADF type only)

Remove the packaging bag and all fixing tape.

Remove the shipping attachment [1] (gold-

colored screw) from the left of the machine.

Shipping attachment [1]

You will be storing the shipping attachment

[1] inside the machine in step 9.

9-2

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

Step

Work

Checks and remarks

Remove the shipping attachment [2] (black

screw) from the right side of the machine.

Shipping attachment [2]

You will be storing the shipping attachment

[2] inside the machine in step 9.

Take out the protective member from the

manual feed tray. (Multifeeder type only)

Protective member

Caution:

This step applies only if the manual feed tray

is attached.

Attach the manual feed tray that comes with

the machine. (Multifeeder type only)

Caution:

This applies only if the manual feed tray

comes packaged with the machine.

Manual feed tray

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-3

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

Step

Work

Checks and remarks

Open the copyboard cover, and remove the

protective sheet. (Copyboard type only)

Caution:

If the protective sheet is not fond on the ma-

chine, go to the next step.

Protective sheet

Open the ADF, and remove the protective

members. (ADF type only)

Caution:

You will need this protective member when

relocating the machine. Be sure to store it

away appropriately.

Protective members

Pull the open/close lever found on the left of

the machine to open the machine’s top unit;

then, remove the two protective members.

Open/close lever

Caution:

If the protective member is not found on the

machine, go to the next step.

Protective member

9-4

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

Step

Work

Checks and remarks

Pick the fixing member from the bottom of the

top unit, and detach it.

Store the shipping attachments [1] and [2] re-

moved in steps 3 and 4 in the machine’s bot-

tom unit.

[2]

[1]

Hold the tab of the cartridge, and take it out of

the machine.

Holding the cartridge with the warning label

facing up, shake it several times in both direc-

tions (90°).

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-5

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

Step

Work

Checks and remarks

Place the cartridge on a level place, and pull

off the open seal.

Holding the tab, pull it straight out in the di-

rection of the arrow.

Caution:

The seal can tear in the middle. Do no pull it at

an angle.

Hold the cartridge with the waning label fac-

ing up, and insert it into the machine with care

until it stops.

Push on the marking found on the top of the

machine to close it fully.

Open the original tray.

Caution:

This step applies to the ADF type only.

Original tray

9-6

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

Step

Work

Checks and remarks

While bending the ADF auxiliary tray in the

direction of arrows in the figure, insert it into

the holes on the edge of the original tray.

Holes

Caution:

This step applies to the ADF type only.

ADF auxiliary tray

Slide in and out the auxiliary tray several

times to make sure that it moves smoothly.

Caution:

This step applies to the ADF type only.

Connect the power cord to the power cord

connector.

Connect the power plug to the power outlet;

then, turn on the power switch.

• Make sure that the AE and DIRECT indica-

tors turn on, the count/ratio indicator indi-

cates ‘1’.

• Press the Count/Zoom Set key and the

Clear/Stop key to check that the copy count

is correct.

• Press the Default Ratio key to check that

different ratios are indicated.

• Check to make sure that a press on the

Zoom Mode key turns on the ‘0’ indication

and a press on the Count/Zoom Set key will

indicate the correct ratio.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-7

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

Step

Work

Attach the copy tray.

Checks and remarks

Check to make sure that the three grooves in

the copy tray are all in place.

Place copy paper inside the cassette. (For

how, see B. “Placing Copy Paper.”)

All notations on the label attached to the ADF

is in English. If a non-English language is

needed, select the appropriate label from

among those that come with the machine and

stick it.

Caution:

This step applies to the ADF type only.

Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard glass,

and make copies to see if the operation is cor-

rect.

• Check to make sure that there is no abnor-

mal noise.

• Check to make sure that as many copies as

specified are made correctly.

Clean the externals of the machine and the

area around the machine.

9-8

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

B. Placing Copy Paper

1. Universal Cassette

Step

Work

Checks and remarks

Take out the cassette from the machine, and

remove the protective members and the label.

Remove the rear guide plate as shown, and

mount it back to suit the size of the copy paper

to be used.

Rear end guide plate

Shift down, and pull off

Turn the fixing lever (front, rear) of the side

paper guide plate as shown, and unlock the

side paper guide plate.

Fixing lever (rear)

Fixing lever (front)

Slide the side paper guide plate to suit the

width of the copy paper to be used; then, turn

the fixing lever as shown to lock the side pa-

per guide plate in place.

Side paper guide plate (rear)

Side paper guide plate (front)

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-9

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

Step

Work

Checks and remarks

Place copy paper in the cassette, and set the

cassette into the machine.

All text on the label attached to the cassette is

English. If you need to replace it with a non-

English label, select the appropriate one from

among those packaged with the machine, and

attach it.

Language label for cassette

9-10

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

2. 250-Sheet/500-Sheet Cassette

Step

Work

Checks and remarks

Take out the cassette from the machine, and

remove the protective member.

Slide the rear end paper guide plate as shown

to match the size of the paper to be used.

Caution:

This step applies to the 500-sheet cassette

(LTR/LGL) only.

Rear end guide plate

Place copy paper in the cassette; then, set the

cassette in the machine.

• 500-sheet cassette

• 250-sheet cassette

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-11

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

III. MOVING THE MACHINE

If you need to move the machine by truck or any other means of transportation after installa-

tion, be sure to perform the following:

Caution:

Before starting the following work, check to make sure that the machines is not too hot. If it is, as

immediately after continuous copying, you may not be able to carry out step 8, in which the

shipping attachment is replaced.

Step

Work

Checks and remarks

Turn on the power, and press the Default Ra-

tio key to select 70%.

Press the Paper Select key to select the manual

feed tray; then, press the Copy Start key with-

out placing any paper on the manual feed tray.

The count/ratio indicator will indicate ' '.

Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the

power plug from the outlet.

Pull the open/close lever found on the left of

the machine, and open the machine’s top unit.

Take out the shipping attachments [1] and [2]

stored in the machine’s bottom unit.

[2]

[1]

Detach the copy tray.

Press down on the

marking on the

machine's top unit to fully close the machine.

9-12

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

Step

Work

Checks and remarks

Fit the shipping attachments [1] and [2] de-

tached in step 5 back to the machine.

Shipping attachment [1]

Shipping attachment [2]

Tape the machine's top unit in place to prevent

it from opening.

Place A4/LGL copy paper on the copyboard

glass, and close the copyboard cover; then,

tape it in place. (Copyboard type only)

Raise the ADF. Then, place two parts used as

packaging so that they fit closely around both

sides and the front of the ADF, as shown in the

diagram, and secure them with tape. (ADF

type only)

Gently lower the ADF and secure the main

unit by taping in eight places, as shown in the

diagram. (ADF type only)

Pack the machine, using the original packing

material and box.

Or tape the machine’s top in place so that it

will not open while in transit.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-13

CHAPTER 10

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED

PARTS....................................... 10-1

II. DURABLES AND

CONSUMABLES ...................... 10-1

III. SCHEDULED SERVICING ....... 10-1

IV. STORING AND HANDLING

THE CARTRIDGE..................... 10-2

A. Storing the Cartridge with the

Packaging Seal Intact ........ 10-2

B. Storing and Handling the

Cartridge with the Packaging

Seal Removed.................... 10-3

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS

The machine does not have parts which must be replaced on a periodical basis.

II. DURABLES AND CONSUMABLES

The machine does not have items designated as durables or consumables.

III. SCHEDULED SERVICING

The machine does not have any parts which require scheduled servicing.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-1

CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

IV. STORING AND HANDLING THE CARTRIDGE

The cartridge is subject to the effects of the environment whether its packing seal is intact or

removed or whether it is inside the machine or otherwise, changing over time regardless of the

number of copies made. The degree of change is highly dependent on the site of installation and

how it is maintained, and no general rule may be drawn; however, it is important to exercise care

when storing or handling it.

A. Storing the Cartridge with the Packaging Seal Intact

If you are storing the cartridge in a warehouse or workshop, be sure that the environment is as

indicated in Table 10-401; in addition, keep the following in mind:

• Avoid direct rays of the sun.

• Avoid vibration.

• Do not subject it to impact (as by hitting or dropping it).

Normal (9/10 of entire storage period)

Harsh (1/10 of entire storage period)

between 0°C/32°F and 35°C/95°F

between 35°C/95°F and 45°C/113°F

between -20°C/-4°F and 0°C/32°F

High temperature

Low temperature

from 40°C/104°F to 15°C/59°F

from -20°C/-4°F to 25°C/77°F

Temperature changes (within 3-min period; approx.)

Normal (9/10 of entire storage period)

between 35% and 85% RH

between 85% and 95% RH

between 10% and 35% RH

High humidity

Harsh (1/10 of entire storage period)

Low humidity

between 613.3 and 1013.3

(hPa; 0.6 to 1 atm)

Atmospheric pressure

Table 10-401 Temperature/Humidity Conditions for Storage

Temperature

Humidity

between -20°C/-4°F and 40°C/104°F

90% or less

Table 10-402 Conditions for Transportation

10-2

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

B. Storing and Handling the Cartridge with the Packaging Seal

Removed

The photosensitive medium is an organic photoconducting (OPC) material, which would dete-

riorate if subjected to storing light.

The cartridge also holds toner, requiring the user to exercise care when storing or handling it.

(Be sure that the user stores it in an appropriate storage box for storage.)

1. Storage after Removing the Packaging Seal

a. Avoid areas subject to the direct rays of the sun, i.e., near a window. Do not keep it in a car for

a long time, as it will be subjected to an extremely high temperature. (This applies even if the

cartridge is inside a protective box.)

b. Avoid areas subjected to high or low temperature/humidity or where temperature or humidity

tends to change abruptly (e.g., near an air conditioner).

c. Avoid areas subject to dust, ammonium gas, or organic solvent.

d. Make sure that the cartridge is stored at 40°C/104°F or lower.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-3

CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

2. Handling the Cartridge

a. Before setting the cartridge in the machine or if copies have white spots as when it starts to run

out of toner, hold the cartridge level and shake it about 90° several times as shown in Figure 10-

401 to even out the toner inside.

If you shake it in a different way, the toner can spill out of the developing assembly or the

cleaning assembly.

Figure 10-401

b. Do not place the cartridge on its end or turn it over as shown in Figure 10-402.

Figure 10-402

10-4

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

c. Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum as by opening the shutter for the photosen-

sitive drum cover found at the bottom of the cartridge.

(If you have soiled the surface of the photosensitive drum, wipe it with a flannel cloth coated

with toner. Do not clean it using solvents.)

d. Do not disassemble the cartridge.

e. Do not subject the cartridge to excess vibration or impact. In particular, do not impose force on

the shutter for the photosensitive drum shutter.

f. Make sure that it is out of reach of children.

g. The photosensitive drum is susceptible to strong light, and the light-blocking shutter is pro-

vided as a means of protection.

If the drum is exposed to strong light for a long time, however, copies can start to show white

spots or vertical bands. Try leaving the machine alone as long as possible if such a problem is

noted; the memory (i.e., cause of white spots or vertical bands), however, may not disappear.

Keep the following in mind:

Caution:

1. Try to work briskly when removing a jam or replacing the cartridge.

2. If the cartridge must be taken out of the machine for storage, be sure to put it in a protective

box or put a cover over it. Do not leave it outside the machine unprotected.

Reference:

If the photosensitive drum is exposed to light of 1500 lux (general lighting) for 5 min and then

left alone in a dark place for 5 min, it should recover so that it will not cause practical prob-

lems. Nevertheless, avoid direct sunshine. (The rays of the sun is as strong as 10000 and

30000 lux.)

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-5

CHAPTER 11

TROUBLESHOOTING

I. MAINTENANCE AND

A. Troubleshooting

INSPECTION ............................ 11-3

A. Image Adjustment Basic

Procedure........................... 11-3

B. Points to Note for

Malfunctions ..................... 11-61

V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING

PROBLEMS ............................ 11-75

A. Copy Paper Jam............... 11-75

B. Faulty Feeding.................. 11-78

VI. ARRANGEMENT AND

Servicing ............................ 11-4

II. STANDARDS AND

ADJUSTMENTS ....................... 11-5

A. Mechanical ......................... 11-5

B. ADF .................................. 11-30

C. Electrical........................... 11-41

III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE

FAULTS ................................... 11-48

A. Making Initial Checks ....... 11-48

B. Sample Image Faults ....... 11-52

C. Troubleshooting Image

FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL

PARTS..................................... 11-79

A. Sensors and Solenoids .... 11-79

B. Switches ........................... 11-80

C. Lamp, Heater, Motor, Etc. 11-81

D. PCBs ................................ 11-82

E. ADF .................................. 11-83

F. Variable Resistors (VR) and

Check Pins by PCB .......... 11-84

VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS .................. 11-86

Faults................................ 11-53

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING

MALFUNCTIONS.................... 11-61

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

Guide to the Troubleshooting Procedure

This chapter provides troubleshooting instructions in the form of tables prepared based on

generally found flow charts. Study the following for an idea of how to use them:

AC power is absent.

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Power plug

Is the power plug connected to the

power outlet?

Connect the plug.

Covers

Are the front door and delivery cover

closed fully?

Is the rated voltage found at the power

outlet?

Is the rated voltage present between J1-

1 and -2? (J1 is found near the power

cord mount.)

YES

Close the door or the

cover.

Inform the user that

Power source

Go to step 6.

---------------

(Rest omitted.)

• To find out the cause (possible fault) of a specific problem, see the "Cause" column.

If the problem is “AC power is absent,” you may suspect that the power plug is disconnected,

covers are not closed fully, or power is absent at the main source.

• If you want to find out the checks to make or action to take, go through the steps: answer the

questions under “Checks”; if yes, take the action shown. Otherwise, go to the next step and

make the indicated checks.

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-1

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

<Step>

Is the power

plug connected to the

power outlet?

Connect

the plug.

YES

Are the front door

and the delivery cover

closed firmly?

Close the door

or the cover.

YES

Is the rated

voltage present at the

power source?

Advise the user

that the problem

is not the copier's.

YES

Rest omitted.

• Often, you will find the following instructions when checking the voltage using a meter: “mea-

sure the voltage between J109-1 (+) and -2 (-) on the DC controller PCB.” The symbol “+”

indicates the terminal to which you are expected to connect the positive probe of the meter and

“-,” the negative probe.

example:

J109-1 (+) ..... Connect the positive probe.

J109-2 (-) ...... Connect the negative probe.

11-2

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

A. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure

Making Pre-Checks

Clean the parts.

Adjusting the Optimum Density

Scanning system,

pickup/feeding system,

delivery assembly

YES

Is gray scale No. 9

barely visible?

Is the copy density

correction switch (SW101) set

to the middle index?

(Note 1)

Can the

deviation be corrected

using the copy density correction

switch (SW101)?

YES

Set it at

the middle.

(Note 1)

Is the optimum

density obtained by intensity

adjustment?

YES

END

Select non-AE, and set the copy density

adjusting lever to the middle index; then,

make two to three copies of the Test

Sheet (NA-3).

(Note 3)

Check the following:

1. Cartridge

2. Scanning lamp

Note:

3. AE sensor PCB

4. DC controller PCB

5. Composite power supply PCB

(See the appropriate troubleshooting

procedure.)

Check the following:

1. Density of gray scale No. 9

2. Presence/absence of difference between front

and rear (Note 2)

3. Density of gray scale No. 1 (good or bad; Note 2)

4. Fogging of background (Note 2)

1. Applies only if the machine is equipped with a copy

density correction switch (SW101).

2. The machine is not equipped with a function to

correct image faults. See the appropriate

troubleshooting procedure.

3. See p. 11-42.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-3

B. Points to Note for Servicing

Copyboard, Scanner

Item

Tools/solvent

Work/remarks

Cleaning.

Copyboard cover

Copyboard glass

Lens

Alcohol

Cartridge

Item

Cleaning.

Dry wiping.

Tools/solvents

Most cloth

Work/remarks

Blower brush

Lint-free paper

Blower brush

Cleaning; be sure to

remove all toner to prevent

toner soiling images.

Drum cover

shutter

Scanning lamp

Reflecting plate

No. 1 through

No. 6 mirror

If dirt cannot be removed,

dry-wiping with lint-free

paper.

Fixing Assembly, Delivery Assembly

Pickup, Feeding, and Transfer Assemblies and Static Eliminator

Item

Tools/solvent

Work/remarks

Cleaning.

Item

Tools/solvents

Work/remarks

Cleaning.

Moist cloth or alcohol

Inlet guide

Solvent

Single-feeder

pickup roller

Moist cloth or alcohol

Cleaning.

Multifeeder,

Pickup roller

Cassette pickup

roller

Registration roller

Transfer guide

Cleaning.

Moist cloth

ADF

Transfer charging

roller

Lint-free paper

Cleaning. Do not use

water or solvent. Take

care not to touch it or

leave solvent or oil.

Item

Tool/solvent

Work/remarks

Dry-wiping.

Feeding belt

Cloth moistened with

water*

Separation pad

Pickup roller

Cloth

Cleaning.

Static eliminator

Feed belt

Special brush

Moist cloth

Cleaning.

Cloth moistened with

water* or alcohol

*Be sure to wring it well.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-4

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

II. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Mechanical

1. Copier

a. Leading Edge Non-Image Width

Make adjustments so that the leading edge non-image width is 2.0 ±1.5 mm when the Test

Sheet is copied in Direct.

Caution:

If you have performed this adjustment, be sure to adjust the image leading edge margin.

2.0 ± 1.5mm

Figure 11-201

1) Turn VR105 on the DC controller PCB so that the width is as indicated.

VR105

J130

J114

J102

VR104VR105VR106

VR107

J106

J103

J107

J104

VR103VR102

J105

J109

Figure 11-202

Turing VR105 and Leading Edge Non-Image Width

Direction of VR105

Clockwise

Leading edge non-image width

Decreases

Counterclockwise

Increases

Table 11-201

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-5

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

b. Image Leading Edge Margin (registration activation timing)

Make adjustments so that the leading edge margin is 2.5 ±1.5 mm when the Test Sheet is

copied.

Caution:

Be sure to check that the leading edge non-image width is as indicated before performing this

adjustment.

2.5 ± 1.5mm

Figure 11-203

1) Turn VR104 on the DC controller PCB so that the margin is as indicated.

VR104

J130

J114

J102

VR104VR105VR106

VR107

J106

J103

J107

J104

VR103VR102

J105

J109

Figure 11-204

Turing VR104 and Image Leading Edge Margin

Direction of VR104

Clockwise

Image leading edge margin

Increases

Counterclockwise

Decreases

Table 11-202

11-6

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

c. Adjusting the Mirror Position (optical length between No. 1 mirror and No. 2 mirror)

If you have replaced the scanner drive cable, you must adjust the mirror position, by changing

the position of the cable retainer of the No. 1 mirror mount.

Reference:

1. As more and more copies are made, the cable tends to become slack, requiring adjustment.

2. If the optical length between the No. 1 mirror and the No. 2 mirror is not correct, the horizontal

reproduction ratio will be wrong, causing poor sharpness or blurred images.

1) Fit the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009) as shown.

Figure 11-205

2) Remove the copyboard glass. (See Chapter 7.III.C.1. “Removing the Copyboard Glass”.)

3) Loosen the screws used to secure the cable retainer at the rear and the front of the No. 1 mirror

mount [1].

[1]

Figure 11-206

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-7

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

4) Turn the cable drive pulley [3] so that the three shafts [2] of the mirror positioning tool for the front

and the rear may be arranged as shown.

[2]

[3]

[2]

Figure 11-207 (rear)

[2]

Figure 11-208 (front)

11-8

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

5) While keeping the condition of 4), tighten the positioning screw at the rear and the front of the No.

1 mirror mount [1].

[1]

Figure 11-209 (rear)

[1]

Figure 11-210 (front)

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-9

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

d. Checking the Force of the Cassette Spring

If the force of the spring used to hold up the holding plate of the cassette is not correct, pickup

faults or the like can occur.

If a fault is suspected, check the force of the spring using a spring gauge (CK-0054), and

replace the spring if it is not as indicated:

Standard: 970 ±150 g

Making Measurements

Push the spring gauge against the middle of the spring as shown, and check to make sure that

the reading of the spring gauge is 970 ±150 g when the holding plate is 18 mm away from the

bottom of the cassette.

Spring gauge

(CK-0054)

Holding plate

Cassette

Cassette spring

Figure 11-211

11-10

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

e-1. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable

Wind 1.5 times. (black

cable)

Wind 7.5 times. (silver-

colored cable)

Figure 11-212

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-11

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

e-2. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable

1. Before Starting the Work

Prepare the following:

• Mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009)

• Cable clip (FY9-3017)

• Adhesive tape

1) Set the mirror positioning tool as shown.

Figure 11-213

2) Prepare about five strips of adhesive tape (each one about 20 × 50 mm).

3) Remove the copyboard glass. (See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing the Copyboard Glass.”)

4) Disconnect the connectors (J101, J131) [1] from the DC controller PCB.

[1]

Figure 11-214

11-12

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

5) If the machine is equipped with an ADF, free the hook [2], and disconnect the two relay connec-

tors [3] from the left upper stay [4].

[2]

[3]

[4]

[2]

[3]

Figure 11-215

6) Remove the three screws [5], and detach the left upper stay [4].

[5]

[4]

Figure 11-216

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-13

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

7) Remove the four screws [7], and detach the lens cover [8].

[7]

[8]

Figure 11-217

11-14

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Routing the Reversing Cable

1) Wind the reversing cables (silver-colored) [2] on the cable drive pulley [1] 7.5 times with the

longer of the two on top; then, secure it in position with a cable clip [3].

[1]

Longer end

Shorter end

[2]

Face with a marking

Figure 11-218

[1]

[3]

Top view

Figure 11-219

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-15

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

2) Put the cable drive pulley [1] into the shaft [4], and secure it in position with an E-ring [5].

When putting the cable drive pulley into the shaft, be sure that the hook is at the front.

[5]

Hook

[1]

(front)

[4]

Figure 11-220

3) Hook the shorter end [6] on the pulley [7].

[7]

[6]

Figure 11-221

11-16

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

4) Lead the shorter end [6] under the No. 1 mirror mount [8] and the No. 2/3 mirror mount [9]; then,

hook it on the left rear pulley [10] and the pulley [11] of the No. 2/3 mirror mount.

[11]

[9]

[8]

[10]

[6]

Figure 11-222

5) After fitting the shorter end [6] on the cable hook [12], secure its end with adhesive tape [13].

Be sure that the secured end of the cable is found where the hole in the left side plate and the tip

of the cable matches.

[13]

[12]

[6]

Figure 11-223

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-17

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

6) Lead the longer end [14] along the cable drive pulley, and hook it on the pulley [15] on the right

front side.

[14]

[15]

[1]

Figure 11-224

7) Lead the longer end [14] under the No. 1 mirror mount [8] and the No. 2/3 mirror mount [9];

then, hook it on the pulley [16] on the left front side and the pulley [17] of the No. 2/3 mirror

mount.

[17]

[8]

[16]

[14]

[9]

Figure 11-225

11-18

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

8) Hook the longer cable [14] on the cable hook [18]; then, secure its end to the left side with

adhesive tape [19].

Be sure that the secured end of the cable is found where the hole in the left side plate and the tip

of the cable matches.

[18]

[19]

[14]

Figure 11-226

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-19

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

3. Routing the Forwarding Cable

1) Fit the longer end forwarding cable (black) [2] on the top hook of the cable drive pulley [1], and

wind it 1.5 times. Then, secure the shorter end [3] as shown with adhesive tape [4].

[4]

[3]

Face without a marking

[2]

[1]

Figure 11-227

2) Lead the longer end [5] along the cable drive pulley [1] as shown, and hook it on the pulley [6]

on the right front side.

[1]

[5]

[6]

Figure 11-228

11-20

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

3) Lead the longer end [5] under the No. 1 mirror mount [7]; then, hook it on the pulley [8] of the No.

2/3 mirror mount, and lead it between the No. 1 mirror mount [7] and the scanning lamp [9].

[8]

[7]

[9]

[5]

Figure 11-229

4) Hook the end of the longer end [5] on the hole [10] on the right side.

[10]

[5]

Figure 11-230

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-21

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

5) Free the shorter end [3], and hook it on the pulley [11] on the right rear side.

[3]

[11]

Figure 11-231

6) Lead the shorter end [3] under the No. 1 mirror mount [7], and hook it on the pulley [12] of the

No. 2/3 mirror mount as shown; then, lead it between the No. 1 mirror mount [7] and the

scanning lamp [9].

[12]

[3]

[9]

[7]

Figure 11-232

11-22

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

7) Hook the end of the shorter end [3] on the hole [13] on the right side.

[3]

[13]

Figure 11-233

8) Free the shorter end [3] and the longer end [5] (reversing cable), and connect both with a spring

[14]; then, fit the stopper [15].

[3]

[14]

[15]

[5]

Figure 11-234

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-23

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

9) Detach the pulley clip [16] from the cable drive pulley [1].

[1]

[16]

Figure 11-235

11-24

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

4. Positioning the No. 1 Mirror Mount

1) Fix the rear and the front of the No. 1 mirror mount [1] temporarily to the metal fixing [2] of the

forwarding cable.

[1]

[2]

Figure 11-236 (rear)

[2]

[1]

Figure 11-237 (front)

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-25

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

2) Turn the cable drive pulley [4] so that the three shafts [3] of the mirror positioning tool for rear and

front is as shown.

[4]

[3]

Figure 11-238 (rear)

[3]

Figure 11-239 (front)

11-26

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

3) While keeping the condition of step 2), tighten the positioning screw on the rear and front of the

No. 1 mirror mount [1].

[1]

Figure 11-240 (rear)

[1]

Figure 11-241 (front)

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-27

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

Point to Note When Mounting the Scanning Lamp

When mounting the scanning lamp, be sure that its logo mark (manufacturer’s name) is toward

the front. Further, be sure that the protrusion near its middle is as shown.

Logo mark

(front)

Scanning lamp

(mirror mount moving in reverse)

45˚ (approx.)

Figure 11-242

Caution:

• If you have replaced the scanning lamp, you must adjust the intensity of the lamp (p. 11-42)

and perform AE adjustment.

• Do not touch the lamp when handling it.

11-28

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

g. Points to Note When Mounting the Fuse

When mounting the thermal fuse of the No. 1 mirror mount, be sure that the fuse is oriented as

shown.

Make sure that the fuse is in contact with the reflecting plate.

Reflecting plate

(front)

Thermal fuse

Figure 11-243

1999 CANONINC.

CANON PC800s/900sREV.0AUG.1999PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

11-29

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. ADF

1. Adjusting the Original Stop Position

Adjust the original stop position in the following order:

1. Correcting original skew

2. Adjusting the rear/front original stop position

3. Adjusting the original leading edge stop position

2. Correcting Original Skew

1) Obtain a sheet of A4 or LTR white copy paper, and draw two lines as indicated.

• The sheet will be used as a test sheet.

10mm

A4/LTR copy papper

Figure 11-244

2) Turn on the machine, and place the test sheet prepared in step 1) on the original tray.

Figure 11-245

11-30

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

3) Press the Copy Start key to make a copy.

4) Check to make sure that the difference between L1 and L2 on the copy is 1.8 mm (standard) or

less.

280mm

Copy image

L1-L2=0 ± 1.8mm

Figure 11-246

5) If the difference is not as specified, turn the adjusting screw found to the side of the left hinge

unit to make adjustments.

Adjusting screw

Figure 11-247

Relationship between Adjusting Screw and L1/L2

Direction of turn

Clockwise

Counterclockwise

Relationship between L1 and L2

L1 > L2

L1 < L2

Table 11-203

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-31

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

3. Adjusting the Rear/Front Original Stop Position

You must first correct original skew before adjusting the rear/front original stop position.

1) Obtain a sheet of A4 or LTR white copy paper, and draw two lines as indicated.

• The sheet will be used as a test sheet.

10mm

A4/LTR copy papper

Figure 11-248

2) Remove the original tray cover from below the original tray.

Original

tray cover

Figure 11-249

11-32

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

3) Turn on the machine, and place the test sheet prepared in step 1) on the original tray.

Figure 11-250

4) Press the Copy Start key to make a copy.

5) Check to make sure that the distance L3 on the copy image indicated is 10 ±2.5 mm (standard)

or less.

Copy image

L3=10 ± 2.5mm

Figure 11-251

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-33

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

6) If the distance is not as specified, loosen the pinion gear positioning screw under the original

tray, and adjust the position of the pinion gear.

Pinion gear

Pinion gear positioning

screw

Figure 11-252

Relationship between Pinion Gear Position and L3

Direction of pinion gear

Increases

Decreases

Table 11-204

11-34

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

4. Adjusting the Original Leading Edge Stop Position

You must first correct original skew and adjust the rear/front original stop position before

adjusting the original leading edge stop position.

1) Obtain a sheet of A4 or LTR white copy paper, and draw two lines as indicated.

• The sheet will be used as a test sheet.

10mm

A4/LTR copy papper

Figure 11-253

2) Remove the screw, and remove the ADF controller cover.

Screw

ADF controller cover

Figure 11-254

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-35

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

3) Turn on the machine, and place the test sheet prepared in step 1) on the original tray.

Figure 11-255

4) Press the Copy Start key to make a copy.

5) Check to make sure that the distance L4 on the copy image indicated is 10 +2.0, -2.5 mm

(standard) or less.

Copy image

L4=10 ± 2.0mm

Figure 11-256

11-36

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

6) If the distance is not as specified, shift bit 1 of the DIP switch (SW1) on the ADF controller

PCB to ON, and place an A4 or LTR white copy paper on the original tray.

SW1

Figure 11-257

7) Press the push switch (PSW) on the ADF controller PCB.

• The copy paper will be picked up from the original tray and stopped on the copyboard glass.

PSW

Figure 11-258

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-37

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

8) Use the rotary switch (SW2) on the ADF controller PCB to adjust the original leading edge

stop position.

Moving the rotary switch by a single notch changes the original stop position by about 0.3 mm.

Press the push switch (PSW) after deciding on a position to discharge the copy paper and store

the optimum value.

PSW

SW2

Figure 11-259

Relationship between Rotary Switch Direction and Original Position

Direction of rotary switch

Clockwise

Position (shift) of original

Toward leading edge

Toward trailing edge

Counterclockwise

Table 11-205

11-38

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

Example:

If L4 is 13 mm,

You must shift the original stop position toward the leading edge by 3 mm.

1) Place a sheet of A4 or LTR white copy paper on the original tray.

2) Shift bit 1 of the DIP switch (SW1) on the ADF controller PCB to ON; then, push the push

switch (PSW) to pick up the copy paper.

SW1

Figure 11-260

3) Turn the rotary switch (SW2) on the ADF controller PCB clockwise by 10 notches.

SW2

Figure 11-261

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-39

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

4) Press the push switch (PSW) on the ADF controller PCB.

• The copy paper on the copyboard will be discharged, and the optimum value will be stored.

PSW

Figure 11-262

11-40

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Electrical

1. After Replacing the Major Parts

Parts

Adjustment

Scanning lamp

1. Intensity of the scanning lamp

2. AE mechanism

AE sensor PCB

1. AE mechanism

Composite power supply

PCB^*1

(1. Intensity of the scanning lamp)

(2. AE mechanism)

DC controller PCB

1. Intensity of the scanning lamp

2. AE mechanism

3. Leading edge non-image width

4. Image leading edge margin

5. Reproduction ratio (fine adjustment)

ADF controller PCB

1. Excute original leading edge stop position ad-

justment

*1: If you have replaced the composite power supply PCB, check copy images using the Test

Sheet; if (and only if) an image fault is found, adjust the intensity of the scanning lamp and

execute AE adjustment.

Table 11-206

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-41

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Adjusting the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp

Adjust the intensity of the scanning lamp if you have replaced any of the following:

• DC controller PCB

• Composite power supply PCB (See p.11-41.)

• Scanning lamp

Caution:

If you have performed this adjustment, you must always perform AE adjustment.

Making Adjustments

1) Set a cartridge in the machine.

2) Set the density correction switch (SW101) to its middle index.

SW101

Figure 11-263

3) Turn off the AE mechanism, and set the copy density adjusting lever on the control panel to its

middle index.

4) Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard, and make a copy.

5) Turn VR107 on the DC controller PCB gradually until gray scale No. 9 is barely visible.

VR107

J130

J114

J102

VR104VR105VR106

VR107

J106

J103

J107

J104

VR103VR102

J105

J109

Figure 11-264

VR107 and Copy Density

Direction of VR107

Clockwise

Copy density

Lighter

Counterclockwise

Darker

Table 11-207

11-42

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

3. AE Adjustment

Perform this adjustment if you have replaced any of the following:

• DC controller PCB

• Composite power supply PCB (See p.11-41.)

• AE sensor PCB

• Scanning lamp

Making Adjustments

Before Starting the Work

• Obtain a newspaper with more or less even print. (Avoid ones with many photos or large

display text.)

• Obtain five sheets of white sheets of paper.

• Be sure that the intensity of the scanning lamp has been adjusted when you have replaced the

scanning lamp.

• Set the density correction switch (SW101) to the middle setting. If the machine is not

equipped with a density correction switch, set the density adjusting lever to the middle set-

ting.

1) Short JP103 and JP104 on the DC controller PCB.

SERVICE

JP104

JP103

Figure 11-265

2) While keeping the condition in step 1), turn on the power.

• The scanning lamp will turn on, and the main motor (M1) will rotate.

3) Stop shorting JP103 and JP104.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-43

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

4) Turn VR103 on the DC controller PCB fully clockwise.

J130

J114

J102

VR104VR105VR106

VR107

J106

J103

J107

J104

VR103VR102

J105

J109

VR103

Figure 11-266

5) Place a newspaper on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.

6) Turn VR102 so that the display indicates ‘A3’ to ‘Ad’.

J130

J114

J102

VR104VR105VR106

VR107

J106

J103

J107

J104

VR103VR102

J105

J109

VR102

Figure 11-267

7) Remove the newspaper from the copyboard, and place five sheets of copy paper in its place;

then, close the copyboard cover.

8) Turn VR103 on the DC controller PCB so that the display will indicate ‘52’ to ‘5c’.

J130

J114

J102

VR104VR105VR106

VR107

J106

J103

J107

J104

VR103VR102

J105

J109

VR103

Figure 11-268

11-44

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

9) Repeat steps 5) through 8) so that the values of both VR102 and VR103 are target values.

Caution:

If you cannot set VR102 and VR103 to the target values at the same time, turn VR103 fully

counterclockwise, and go back to step 5) and make adjustments once again.

10) Make a copy, and check to make sure that it is free of fogging and its text is adequately dark.

• If the copy is foggy or its text is too light, go back to step 1) and start over.

• If the results of adjustment for a second time are not good, make adjustments using the den-

sity correction switch (SW101).

Lighter

Darker

SW101

Figure 11-269

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-45

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

4. Adjusting the Reproduction Ratio (fine adjustment)

Adjust the reproduction ratio if you have replaced the following:

• DC controller PCB

Making Adjustments

Before Starting the Work

• Meter

1) Before replacing the DC controller PCB, turn on the power; then, connect the meter probes to

CP23 and GND on the DC controller PCB, and measure the voltage.

+ probe ........CP23

- probe .........GND

GND

VR106

CP23

VR104

VR105 VR106

VR107

Figure 11-270

2) After replacing the DC controller PCB, measure the voltage as in step 1); then, turn VR106 on

the DC controller PCB so that the reading is the same as before replacement.

11-46

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

5. Checking the Photointerrupters

1) Set the meter range to 12 VDC.

2) Connect the - probe to GND (CPGND1) on the DC controller PCB.

GND

VR104

VR105 VR106

VR107

Figure 11-271

3) Make checks as instructed.

Reference:

The photointerrupers other than those shown in Table 11-209 are connected in a matrix, hence

the omission from the table.

Voltage

(approx.)

Sensor

Connector

Checks

PS1

J101-3

During standby, move When the light-block-

Scanner home position

sensor (SCHP)

the scanner by hand.

ing plate is at PS1,

When the light-block-

ing plate is not at PS1,

PS2

J109-10

J132-5

J108-3

During standby, move When the light-block-

the lens mount by

hand.

Lens home position sen-

sor (LHP)

ing plate is at PS2,

When the light-block-

ing plate is not at PS2,

PS4

During standby, move When the light-block-

the detecting lever by ing plate is at PS4,

hand.

Vertical path roller pa-

per sensor (PDP)

When the light-block-

ing plate is not at PS4,

Q751

During standby, move When the light-block-

the detecting lever by ing plate is at Q751,

hand.

Pre-registration roller

paper sensor (RPD)

When the light-

blocking plate is not at

Q751,

Table 11-208

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-47

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS

A. Making Initial Checks

1. Site Environment

Check the site against the following considerations:

a. The voltage of the power source is as rated.

b. The site must not be subject to high temperature or humidity (as near a water faucet, water

boiler, humidifier) or dust. The machine must not be near a source of fire.

c. The site must not be subject to ammonium gas.

d. The machine must not be exposed to direct rays of the sun. (As necessary, instruct the user to

provide curtains.)

e. The site must be well ventilated.

f. The machine must be kept level.

2. Checking the Originals

Check the originals to find out whether the problem in question is caused by the machine or the

originals.

a. The copy density adjusting lever is often best if set to the middle index.

b. Originals with a red tint tend to produce copies with poor contrast; e.g., red sheets.

c. Originals which are diazo copies or with transparency tend to produce copies which can be

mistaken for "foggy" copies.

Originals prepared in pencil tend to produce copies with "light" images.

3. Copyboard Cover and Copyboard Glass

If the copyboard cover or the copyboard glass is soiled, clean it with mild detergent solution or

alcohol; if scratched, replace it.

4. Lens

Check the lens for dirt. If any, clean it with a cotton swab.

5. Checking the Transfer Charging Roller

a. Check the transfer charging roller for dirt or fault (scratches).

6. Feeding Assembly

Check the feeding assembly for dirt. If any dirt is found, clean it with a moist cloth.

7. Copy Paper

a. Is copy paper of a type recommended by Canon?

b. Is copy paper moist?

Try paper fresh out of package.

11-48

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

8. Consumable

a. Cartridge

When the cartridge starts to run out of toner, copies will start to have white lines or spots as

shown.

Figure 11-301

Try the following as necessary:

1) Take out the cartridge from the machine, and shake it several times.

Figure 11-302

2) Set the cartridge back into the machine, and make copies.

• If the copies are normal,

You may continue to use the cartridge, but the user must know that it must be replaced with

a new cartridge soon.

• If the copies are not normal,

Replace the new cartridge.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-49

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

9. Others

When a machine is brought in from a cold place (e.g., warehouse) to a warm place, condensa-

tion can occur inside it, leading to various problems; e.g.,

a. Condensation on the scanner (glass, lens, mirror, reflecting plate) will cause dark images.

b. The drum is likely to be cold (high OPC electrical resistance), not enabling good contrast.

c. Condensation in the pickup/feeding assembly tends to cause feeding faults.

d. Condensation on the lower roller of the manual feed assembly will reduce friction, causing

pickup faults.

If condensation is noted, dry wipe the parts in question.

The cartridge can develop condensation if it is opened immediately after it has been brought

from a cold to warm place. Instruct the user so that the cartridge is not opened before it has become

used to the room temperature (one to two hours).

11-50

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-51

NOTE: The samples are created intentionally. The NA-3 Test Sheet was copied in the direct mode

in A3 and printed with a reduction of about 19%; actual images may be somewhat different.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-52

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Troubleshooting Image Faults

1 The copy is too light. (halftone area only)

2 The copy is too light. (including solid area)

3 The copy is too light. (enter image, appreciably)

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Lens, Reflect-

ing plate, AE

sensor, Static

eliminator

Clean the lens, reflecting plate, AE sensor,

and static eliminator. Is the problem

corrected?

YES

End.

---------------

Turn off the power in the middle of a

copying run, and open the machine’s top

unit. Is the toner image before transfer

more or less normal? (Be sure to make a

check in a short time to protect the drum

from light.)

Go to step 6.

Transfer

charging roller

Is the transfer charging roller normal?

1. Mount the transfer

charging roller

correctly.

2. Replace the transfer

charging roller.

1. The copy paper may

be moist. Instruct the

user on the correct

method of storage.

2. Inform the user that

using non-recom-

mended paper may

not bring the best

results.

Copy paper

Try fresh copy paper. Is the problem

corrected?

YES

Transfer lower

guide, Varis-

tor

Measure the electrical resistance on the

transfer lower guide plate and the side

plate (metal) of the fixing assembly. Is it

0Ω?

YES

1. Check to find out if

the transfer lower

guide happens to be in

contact with a metal

part (side plate).

2. Replace the varistor.

1. Check the transfer

high-voltage terminal

contacts for electrical

continuity.

2. Check the composite

power supply and the

DC controller PCB.

End.

Replace the electric unit

(composite power supply

PCB, DC controller

PCB).

Composite

power supply

PCB, DC

controller

PCB

Cartridge

Replace the cartridge. Is the problem

corrected?

YES

Developing

bias, Develop-

ing bias

terminal

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-53

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 The copy has uneven density. (darker at front)

5 The copy has uneven density. (lighter at front)

Cause

Scanner

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting

plate, lens, and mirror. Is the problem

corrected?

YES

End.

Cartridge,

Scanning

lamp

Turn off the power in the middle of a

copying run, and open the machine. Is

the toner image on the photosensitive

drum before transfer more or less

uneven?

YES

1. Replace the car-

tridge.

2. Replace the scan-

ning lamp.

1. Mount the transfer

charging roller

correctly.

Transfer

charging

roller

2. Replace the transfer

charging roller

correctly.

6 The copy is foggy. (entire face)

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

---------------

Is the density correction switch

(SW101) or the density adjusting lever

set to the middle setting?

Set the switch or the

lever to the middle

setting, and make a

copy. If the image is

still foggy, to step 2).

End.

Scanner

Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting

plate, lens, and mirror. Is the problem

corrected?

Set the cartridge in the machine. Is

there electrical continuity between the

PCB of the base of the drum and the

machine’s top unit?

YES

Grounding

spring

Check to see if the

grounding spring is

mounted correctly (in

reference to the drum

drive gear).

Scanning

lamp, Devel-

oping bias

YES

1. Check the activation

of the scanning

lamp.

2. Check the develop-

ing assembly.

11-54

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

7 The copy is foggy vertically.

8 The copy has black lines. (vertical, fuzzy, thick)

9 The copy has black lines. (vertical, fine)

Cause

Scanner

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting

plate, lens, and mirror. Is the problem

corrected?

Clean the transfer guide assembly. Is

the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Transfer

guide assem-

bly

YES

Cartridge

Take out and then set the cartridge

once again. Is the problem corrected?

YES

Replace the cartridge.

10 The copy has white spots. (vertical)

11 The copy has white lines. (vertical)

Cause

Fixing

assembly

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Check the fixing

assembly.

Turn off the power in the middle of a

copying run, and open the machine’s

top unit. Does the copy image before

moving through the fixing assembly

have white spots or white lines?

Shake the cartridge several times. Is

the problem corrected?

YES

Cartridge

YES

Inform the user that

the cartridge is run-

ning out of toner.

End.

Static elimi-

nator

Transfer

charging

roller

Clean the static eliminator. Is the

problem corrected?

Is there foreign matter or scratches in

the transfer charging roller assembly?

YES

Remove the foreign

matter, or replace the

transfer charging

roller.

Cartridge

Replace the cartridge.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-55

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

12 The copy has white spots. (horizontal)

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Copy paper

Is the paper of a recommended type?

YES

Try a recommend

type. If the results are

good, ask the user to

use a recommended

type.

Try paper fresh out of package. Is the

problem corrected?

YES

Yes

The paper may be

moist. Instruct the user

on the correct method

of storing paper.

1. Check the scanner

rail for foreign

Scanner rail

Is the problem noted at the same

position on all copies?

matter.

2. Adjust the tension

of the scanner cable.

Check the scanning

lamp for flickering

and the presence/

absence of a develop-

ing bias.

Scanning

lamp, Devel-

oping bias

13 The back of the copy is soiled.

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

---------------

Turn off the power while copy paper is

moving through the feeding assembly.

Is the back of the paper soiled?

Is the transfer guide assembly soiled?

Go to step 3.

Transfer

guide assem-

bly

YES

1. Clean the transfer

guide.

2. Clean the registra-

tion roller.

3. Check the varistor.

4. Check the cartridge

for leakage of toner.

Clean the feeding

assembly.

Clean the pickup guide

assembly and the

delivery roller.

Feeding

Is the feeding assembly soiled?

YES

assembly

Pickup guide

assembly,

Delivery

roller

11-56

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

14 The copy has a fixing fault.

Cause

Copy paper

Step

Checks

Is the copy paper of a recommended

type?

YES/NO

Action

Try a recommended

type. If the results are

good, ask the user to

use a recommended

type.

Fixing film

Is the problem vertical and, in addi-

tion, in the form of lines?

YES

Check the fixing film

and the fixing lower

roller for scratches. If

there are scratches,

replace them.

Fixing heater

Does the heater turn on when the Copy

Start key is pressed?

See “The fixing heater

fails to turn on.”

DC control-

ler PCB,

YES

The control tempera-

ture of the fixing

Composite

power

supply PCB

heater is likely to be

too low. Check the

fixing assembly top

unit, DC controller

PCB, and composite

power supply PCB.

15 The copy has a misplaced leading edge. (extremely excess margin)

16 The copy has a misplaced leading edge. (excess margin)

17 The copy has a misplaced leading edge (no margin)

Cause

Pickup

roller,

Pickup

clutch,

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Make copies using the cassette and

manually. Are the results the same?

Check the pickup

roller, pickup clutch,

and cassette. Or,

replace them.

Cassette

Sensor

(PS1), Light-

blocking

plate

Are the scanner home position sensor

(PS1) and the light-blocking plate

normal? (See the instructions on how

to check the photointerrupter.)

Replace the sensor, or

check the light-

blocking plate.

VR104

Adjust the image leading edge margin.

(p. 11-6) Is the problem corrected?

Does the registration clutch solenoid

(SL2) operate normally?

YES

End.

Solenoid

(SL2), DC

controller

PCB

1. Check the solenoid

(SL2).

2. Check the DC

control PCB.

Copy paper

Is the paper of a recommended type?

Try a recommended

type. If the results are

good, ask the user to

use a recommended

type.

Registration

clutch

YES

Check the registration

clutch.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-57

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

18 The copy has a blurred image.

Cause

Scanner

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

1. Route the cable

correctly.

Does the cable wind on itself when the

scanner is moving? Or, is the cable too

slack or too taut?

YES

drive cable

Scanner rail

---------------

2. If the cable is

twisted or frayed,

replace it.

Clean the surface of

the scanner rail with

alcohol. Then, apply

lubricant. (CK-0551)

See "The scanner fails

to move forward/in

reverse."

Move the No. 1 mirror mount slowly

by hand. Does it move slowly?

Is abnormal noise heard from the

scanner motor?

YES

Feeding

system

Cartridge

Does the copy paper spring up or stop

around the transfer assembly?

YES

Check the feeding

assembly for burrs.

Replace the cartridge.

19 The copy has horizontal fogging.

Cause

Scanning

lamp

Step

Checks

Does the scanning lamp flicker?

YES/NO

Action

Replace the scanning

lamp.

YES

Cartridge,

High-voltage

transformer

assembly

Replace the cartridge. Is the problem

corrected?

YES

End.

Check the high-

voltage transformer

(composite power

supply PCB).

Check the scanning

system.

Scanning

system

Feeding

system

Make a reduced copy, and compare it

against one made in Direct. Is the

problem found at different positions?

YES

Check the feeding

system.

11-58

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

20 The copy has poor sharpness. (out-of-focus)

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

---------------

Is the image also too light?

YES

Correct the light

image problem first.

1. Check the

Original

Is the original off the copyboard glass?

YES

copyboard cover too

see if it happens to

be warping.

2. Instruct the user on

the correct method

of placing originals.

Check the lens rail for

foreign matter, and

clean it.

Adjust the distance

between No. 1 mirror

and the No. 2 mirror.

End.

Lens

Turn off and then on the power switch.

Does the lens move smoothly?

Mirror

position

Is the horizontal ratio in Direct within

specification?

Scanner

Cartridge

Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting

plate, mirror, and lens. Is the problem

corrected?

YES

Replace the cartridge.

21 The copy is blank.

Cause

Cartridge

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Set the cartridge in the

machine.

Is the cartridge set in the machine?

Does the cartridge have toner?

Has the open seal been removed?

YES

Replace the cartridge.

Remove the opening

seal.

Set the cartridge in the machine, and

close the machine. Does the drum

cover shutter open properly?

Does the drum drive gear rotate

normally?

Is the primary charging terminal on

the front left of the cartridge in firm

contact with the high-voltage terminal

at the machine's bottom?

Check the cartridge.

Drum drive

assembly

High-voltage

transformer

Check the drum drive

assembly.

Check the high-

voltage transformer

(composite power

supply PCB).

YES

Primary

1. Check the contacts

for electrical conti-

nuity.

2. Replace the car-

tridge

high-voltage

charging

terminal,

cartridge

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-59

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

22 The copy is solid black.

Cause

---------------

Step

Checks

Does the scanning lamp remain on

during copying?

YES/NO

Action

See “The scanning

lamp fails to turn on.”

Is the cartridge set

correctly?

YES

11-60

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS

A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions

1 E0

Cause

----------------

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

See the instructions

given for the respec-

tive error code.

End.

1) Turn off the power, and short JP101

and JP102 on the DC controller

PCB with a screwdriver.

YES

JP102

JP101

Figure 11-401

2) While keeping the condition in step

1), turn on the power switch.

3) Is an error code indicated in re-

sponse to a press on the Copy Start

key?

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-61

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

2 E000

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Thermistor

(TH1)

Are the connection of J102 on the DC

controller PCB and the wiring to the

thermistor (TH1) normal?

Correct the connection

of J102 on the DC

controller PCB and the

wiring to the ther-

mistor (TH1).

Heater,

Fuse (FU2)

Is there electrical continuity between

J207-1 and -2 on the fixing heater

side?

Check the wiring from

the composite power

supply PCB to the

fixing heater; if

normal, replace the

fixing assembly upper

unit.

Thermistor

(TH1)

Composite

power

Replace the fixing upper unit. Is the

problem corrected?

Replace the composite power supply

PCB. Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

supply PCB

DC control-

ler PCB

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

3 E001

Cause

Thermistor

(TH1)

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Are the connection of J102 on the DC

controller PCB and the wiring to the

thermistor (TH1) normal?

Correct the connection

of J102 on the DC

controller PCB and the

wiring to the ther-

mistor (TH1).

Thermistor

Replace the fixing assembly upper

unit. Is the problem corrected?

Replace the composite power supply

PCB. Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Composite

power

End.

supply PCB

DC control-

ler PCB

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

11-62

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 E002, E003

Cause

Thermistor

(TH1)

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Is the connection of J102 on the DC

controller PCB and the wiring to the

thermistor (TH1) normal?

Correct the connection

of J102 on the DC

controller PCB and the

wiring to the ther-

mistor (TH1).

Heater,

Fuse (FU2)

Is there electrical continuity between

J207-1 and -2 on the fixing heater

side?

Check the wiring from

the composite power

supply PCB to the

fixing heater; if

normal, replace the

fixing upper unit.

End.

Thermistor

(TH1)

Composite

power

Replace the fixing assembly upper

unit. Is the problem corrected?

Replace the composite power supply

PCB. Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

supply PCB

DC control-

ler PCB

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

5 E010

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Wiring 1

Are the connection of J205 on the

composite power supply PCB and the

wiring to the main motor (M1) nor-

mal?

Correct the connection

of J205 on the com-

posite power supply

PCB and the wiring to

the main motor (M1).

Correct the connection

and wiring of the

Wiring 2

Is the wiring from J203 and J202 on

the composite power supply PCB to

J103 and J105, respectively, on the DC

controller PCB normal?

Turn on the power switch. Is the

voltage between J901-1 (+) and -2 (-)

on the main motor drive PCB about 24

connectors.

DC power

supply

Check the wiring from

the main motor driver

PCB to the composite

power supply PCB; if

normal, see “DC

power fails to turn

on.”

Main motor

(M1)

DC control-

ler PCB

Replace the main motor (M1). Is the

problem corrected?

YES

End.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-63

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

6 E064

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Wiring

Turn off and then on the power switch;

then, set the copy count to '1'. Is 'E064'

indicated at the end of a copying run?

YES

Check the wiring

between the DC

controller PCB and the

composite power

supply PCB. Check

the wiring between the

composite power

supply PCB and the

high-voltage contact

PCB.

High-voltage

contact

Is the connection between the high-

voltage contacts of the machine's top

and bottom units normal?

Correct the high-

voltage contacts of the

machine's top and

bottom units.

Transfer

charging

roller

Primary

charging

roller

Is the transfer charging roller or the

contact faulty?

YES

Replace the transfer

charging roller.

Replace the cartridge. Is the problem

corrected?

End.

High-voltage

cable

Composite

power

Does the high-voltage cable have

scratches or tears?

Replace the composite power supply

PCB. Is the problem corrected?

YES

Replace the high-

voltage cable.

End.

supply PCB

DC control-

ler PCB

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

7 The keys on the control panel are locked. ('E202')

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

----------------

Is the scanner in the home position

when 'E202' turns on?

Is the scanner home position sensor

(PS1) normal? (For instructions on

how to check photointerrupers, see p.

11-47.)

See “The scanner fails

to move forward.”

Check the wiring from

J101 on the DC

controller PCB to PS1;

if normal, replace PS1.

Replace the DC

Scanner

home posi-

tion sensor

(PS1)

DC control-

ler PCB

YES

controller PCB.

11-64

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

8 E210

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

----------------

Does the lens move when the power is

turned on?

See “The lens fails to

move.”

Lens home

position

sensor (PS2)

Is the lens home position sensor (PS2)

normal? (For instructions on how to

check the photointerrupers, see p. 11-

47.)

Check the wiring from

J109 on the DC

controller PCB to PS2;

if normal, replace PS2.

Replace the DC

DC control-

ler PCB

YES

controller PCB.

9 E220

Cause

----------------

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

See “The scanning

lamp fails to turn on.”

End.

Does the scanning lamp turn on when

the Copy Start key is pressed?

Replace the composite power supply

PCB. Is the problem corrected?

Composite

power

supply PCB

DC control-

ler PCB

YES

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

10 E240

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Wiring

Is the wiring from J203 and J204 on

the composite power supply PCB and

J103 and J104, respectively, on the DC

controller PCB normal?

Correct the connection

and the wiring of the

connectors.

Composite

power

supply PCB

DC control-

ler PCB

Replace the composite power supply

PCB. Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

11 E261

Cause

Power

supply

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Turn off and then on the power switch.

Is the problem corrected?

YES

End. However, if

‘E261’ occurs fre-

quently, advise the

user to use a frequency

stabilizer.

frequency

Composite

power

Replace the composite

power supply PCB.

supply PCB

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-65

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

12 E400

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

----------------

Turn off and then on the power. Is the

probrem corrected?

YES

End. (Check the

wiring between the

copier’s DC controller

PCB and the ADF

controller PCB.)

Replace the ADF

controller PCB.

5V power

supply

Set the matter to the 20VDC range,

and connect the + probe to the foot of

the push swich on the ADF controller

PCB and the - probe to the copier

ground. Is the voltage about 5V?

Figure 11-402

ADF con-

troller PCB

Replace the ADF controller PCB. Is

the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Replace the copier’s

DC controller PCB.

13 E803

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Malfunction

Turn off and then on the power switch.

Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

DC control-

ler PCB.

Composite

power

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is the

problem corrected?

YES

End.

Replace the composite

power supply PCB.

supply PCB

11-66

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

14 AC power fails to turn on.

Cause

Power plug

Step

Checks

Is the power plug connected to the

power outlet?

YES/NO

Action

Connect the power

plug.

----------------

Turn on the power switch. Is ‘E0’

indicated in the display?

Is the machine’s top unit closed

firmly?

Is the rated voltage present at the

power outlet?

YES

See the descriptions

under “E0.”

Close the machine's

top unit.

Inform the user that

the problem is not the

machine’s.

Machine top

unit

Power

supply

Fuse

(FU501)

Is the fuse (FU501) on the noise filter

PCB blown?

YES

Remove the cause, and

replace the fuse.

120V model:

250 V, 15 A

220/240V model: 250 V, 6.3 A

Is the fuse (FU102) on the composite

power supply PCB blown?

Fuse

(FU102)

Remove the cause of

the problem, and

replace the fuse.

120V model:

125 V, 5 A

220/240V model: 250 V, 2.5 A

Remove the door switch (DS1), and

connect the meter probes to F1 and F3

or F2 and F4 of the faston of the door

switch. Is the resistance about 0 Ω

when the actuator is pressed add about

∞ Ω when it is released?

Is the rated voltage present between

J501-1 and -2?

Is the rated voltage present between

J201-1 and J201-2?

Door switch

(DS1)

Replace the door

switch (DS1).

Noise filter

PCB

Harness

Replace the noise

filter PCB.

Check the connectors

and the wiring if they

are normal.

Connector

connection 1

Is there electrical continuity between

J111-15 on the DC controller PCB and

J301-15 on the control panel PCB?

Correct the electrical

continuity of J111 on

the DC controller PCB

and J301 on the

control panel PCB.

Check the connection

of J104 on the DC

controller PCB and

J204 on the composite

power supply PCB; if

normal, replace the

DC controller PCB.

End.

Connector

connection 2

Is there electrical continuity between

J204-1 on the composite power supply

PCB and J104-7 on the DC controller

PCB?

Control

Replace the control panel PCB.Is the

problem corrected?

YES

panel PCB

Composite

power

Replace the composite

power supply PCB.

supply PCB

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-67

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

15 DC power fails to turn on.

Cause

AC power

supply

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

See “AC power fails

to turn on.”

Is AC power present between J201-1

and -2 on the composite power supply

PCB?

Wiring, DC

load

Turn off the power switch, and discon-

nect J202 and J205 from the composite

power supply PCB.

YES

See the descriptions

under “E0.”

Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and

turn on the power switch. Is the

voltage between the following termi-

nals normal?

Connector Pin Output Remarks

J202

GND

24V

To DC

controller

PCB

GND

24V

J205

To main

motor

driver

PCB

GND

24V

Table 11-401

Fuse

Is the fuse (FU102) on the composite

power supply PCB blown?

YES

Remove the cause of

the problem, and

replace the fuse.

Replace the composite

power supply PCB.

120V model:

125 V, 5 V

Composite

power

220/240V model: 250 V, 2.5 A

supply PCB

11-68

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

16 Pickup fails. (cassette)

Cause

Main motor

(M1)

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

See “The main motor

fails to rotate.”

Set the cassette cor-

rectly.

Instruct the user on the

correct method of

placing paper.

Does the main motor (M1) rotate when

the Copy Start key is pressed?

Is the cassette set correctly?

Cassette

Paper in

cassette

Is the paper in the cassette placed

correctly?

Pickup

clutch

solenoid

(SL1),

Cassette

pickup

solenoid

(SL5)

Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and

connect the meter probes to the fol-

lowing terminals. Does the voltage

change to about 24 V in keeping with

pickup operation?

Check the wiring from

the solenoid to the DC

controller PCB; if

normal, replace the

solenoid.

Pickup clutch

solenoid (SL1)

Cassette pickup

solenoid (SL5)

J109-4 J109-3

J132-2 J132-1

Table 11-402

Cassette

spring

Is the force of the cassette spring

within specification? (See p. 11-10.)

Replace the cassette

spring.

DC control-

ler PCB

YES

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-69

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

17 Pickup fails. (multifeeder)

Cause

Wrong

operation

Step

Checks

Is the multifeeder selected on the

control panel?

YES/NO

Action

Instruct the user on the

correct way of operat-

ing the machine.

Main motor

(M1)

Paper place-

ment

Does the main motor (M1) rotate when

the Copy Start key is pressed?

Is the paper placed in the multifeeder

correctly?

See “The main motor

fails to rotate.”

Instruct the user on the

correct way of placing

paper.

Multifeeder

pickup

solenoid

(SL4),

Pickup

clutch

solenoid

(SL1)

DC control-

ler PCB

Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and

connect the meter probes as indicated.

Does the voltage change to about 24 V

in keeping with pickup operation?

Check the wiring from

the solenoid to the DC

controller PCB; if

normal, replace the

solenoid in question.

Multifeeder

pickup solenoid J109-8 J109-7

(SL4)

YES

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

Pickup clutch

J109-4 J109-3

solenoid (SL1)

Table 11-403

18 Pickup fails. (single-feeder)

Cause

Main motor

(M1)

Single-feeder

paper sensor

(PS5)

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

See “The main motor

fails to rotate.”

Check the wiring from

J113 to PS5 on the DC

control PCB; if nor-

mal, replace PS5.

Replace the DC

Does the main motor rotate when the

Copy Start key is pressed?

Is the single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)

normal?

DC control-

ler PCB

YES

controller PCB.

11-70

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

19 The scanner fails to move forward.

Cause

Cable

Step

Checks

Is the scanner drive cable routed

correctly?

YES/NO

Action

Route the cable

correctly.

Scanner path

Is the scanner rail soiled?

Move the scanner by hand. Does it

move smoothly?

Check the surface of

the scanner rail for

dirt, foreign matter, or

object which may

interfere.

Composite

power

supply PCB

Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and

connect the meter probes to J202-2 (+)

and -1 (-) on the composite power

supply PCB. Is the meter reading

about 24 V?

Is the pre-registration roller paper

sensor (Q751) normal? (For instruc-

tions on how to check the

See “DC power fails

to turn on.”

Pre-registra-

tion roller

paper sensor

(Q751)

Check the wiring from

J108 on the DC

controller PCB to

Q751; if normal,

replace Q751.

End.

photointerrupers, see p. 11-47.)

Scanner/lens

drive motor

(M2)

DC controller

PCB

Replace the scanner/lens drive motor

(M2). Is the problem corrected?

YES

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

20 The registration roller fails to rotate.

Cause

Main motor

(M1)

Step

Checks

Yes/No

Action

See “The main motor

fails to rotate.”

Does the main motor (M1) start to

rotate when the Copy Start key is

pressed?

Pre-registra-

tion roller

paper sensor

(Q751)

Is the pre-registration roller paper

sensor (Q751) normal? (For instruc-

tions on how to check the

Check the wiring from

J108 on the DC

controller PCB to

Q751; if normal,

photointerrupers, see p. 11-47.)

replace Q751.

Registration

roller spring

clutch

Does the registration clutch solenoid

(SL2) turn on for a moment after the

Copy Start key is pressed?

Yes

Check the position of

the solenoid; if nor-

mal, check or replace

the control ring.

Check the wiring from

J109 on the DC

controller PCB to SL2;

if normal, replace SL2.

Replace the DC

Registration

clutch

solenoid

(SL2)

DC control-

ler PCB

Set the meter range to 30 VDC. Does

the voltage between J109-6 (+) and -5

(-) on the DC controller PCB change

to about 24 V for a moment after the

Copy Start key is pressed?

controller PCB.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-71

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

21 The blanking lamp fails to turn on.

Cause

Side blank-

ing PCB

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Remove J106 from the DC control

PCB, and set the meter range to 1 kΩ;

then, connect the meter probes to

J106-1 and -2 on the harness side. Is

the meter reading about 20 Ω?

Check the harness; if

normal, replace the

side blanking PCB.

Replace the DC

DC control-

ler PCB

YES

controller PCB.

22 The scanning lamp fails to turn on.

Cause

Scanning

lamp

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Mount the scanning

lamp correctly.

Turn off the power switch, and discon-

nect the power plug from the power

outlet.Is the scanning lamp (LA1)

mounted correctly?

Fuse (FU1)

Lamp

Set the meter range to 1 kΩ, and

connect the meter probes to both

terminals of the fuse (FU1). Does the

index of the meter swing?

Disconnect the connector J910 from th

ecomposite power supply PCB, and set

the tester range to 1kΩ.

Does the tester index swing when the

probes are connected to J910-1 and

J910-3 on the lamp side?

Replace the fuse

(FU1).

Check the cable from

the composite power

supply PCB to the

lamp; if normal,

replace the lamp.

DC control-

ler PCB

Composite

power

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is the

problem corrected?

YES

End.

Check the wiring

between the DC

controller PCB and the

composite power

supply PCB; if nor-

mal, replace the

composite power

supply PCB.

supply PCB

11-72

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

23 The lens fails to turn on.

Cause

Lens sole-

noid (SL3)

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Check the wiring from

J109 on the DC

Does the lens solenoid (SL3) turn on

when the power switch is turned on?

controller PCB to SL3;

if normal, replace SL3.

Check the lens cable,

pulley, and rail; as

necessary, clean the

cable and adjust its

tension.

Lens cable,

Pulley, Rail

Are the lens cable, pulley, and rail

normal?

DC power

supply

Set the meter range to the 30 VDC,

and connect J202-2 (+) and -1 (-) on

the composite power supply PCB. Is

the meter reading about 24 V?

Replace the scanner/lens drive motor

(M2). Is the problem corrected?

See “DC power fails

to turn on.”

Scanner/lens

drive motor

(M2)

DC control

PCB

YES

End.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

24 The fixing heater fails to turn on.

Cause

----------------

Step

Checks

Is 'E0' indicated?

YES/NO

Action

See the descriptions

under “E0.”

End.

YES

DC control-

ler PCB

Composite

power

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is the

problem corrected?

YES

Replace the composite

power supply PCB.

supply PCB

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-73

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

25 The "Add Paper" message fails to turn off.

Cause

Cassette

Step

Checks

Is the cassette set correctly?

YES/NO

Action

Set the cassette cor-

rectly.

Lens cable,

Pulley, Rail

Are the lens cable, pulley, and rail

normal?

Check the lens cable,

pulley, and rail; as

necessary, clean the

cable and adjust its

tension.

DC power

supply

Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and

connect the meter probes to J202-2 (+)

and -1 (-) on the composite power

PCB. Is the meter reading about 24 V?

Is the vertical path roller paper sensor

(PS4) normal? (For instructions on

how to check the photointerrupters,

see p. 11-47.)

See “The DC power

fails to turn on.”

Vertical path

roller paper

sensor (PS4)

Check the wiring from

J132 on the DC

controller PCB to PS4;

if normal, replace the

PS4.

Control

Replace the control panel PCB. Is the

problem corrected?

YES

End.

panel PCB

DC control-

ler PCB

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

26 The "Jam" message fails to turn off.

Cause

Jam paper

Step

Checks

Is the jam paper near any of the

following sensors?

YES/NO

Action

Remove the jam

paper.

YES

• Vertical path roller paper sensor

(PS4)

• Single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)

• Pre-registration roller paper sensor

(Q751)

• Delivery sensor (PS3)

Sensor

Is the sensor checked in step 1 nor-

mal? (For instructions on how to check

the photointerrupers, see p. 11-47.)

Check the wiring from

the DC controller PCB

to each sensor; if

normal, replace the

sensor in question.

Replace the DC

DC control-

ler PCB

YES

controller PCB.

11-74

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS

A. Copy Paper Jam

Inside the machine, jams tend occur in the following blocks:

[1] Pickup block

[2] Separation/feeding block

[3] Fixing/delivery block

The troubleshooting procedures that follow are organized according to the location of a jam.

[3]

[2]

[1]

Figure 11-501

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-75

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

1 Pickup Assembly

Cause

----------------

Step

Checks

Does the problem occur when the

cassette is selected as the source of

paper?

YES/NO

Action

Go to step 5.

Cassette

Is the cassette set correctly?

Set the cassette cor-

rectly.

Copy paper

Is the copy paper curled or wavy?

YES

Replace the copy

paper. Instruct the user

on the correct method

of storing paper.

Ask the user to use

recommended paper.

See “Pickup fails” for

the source of paper in

question.

Copy paper

Try paper recommended by Canon. Is

the problem corrected?

Does the pickup roller of the pickup

assembly of the selected source

(cassette, manual feeder) rotate during

a copying run?

YES

DC control-

ler PCB,

Pickup

clutch

Registration

roller drive

assembly

Vertical path

roller paper

sensor (PS4)

Pickup

roller,

Vertical path

roller, Roll

Does the registration roller operate

normally?

See “The registration

roller fails to rotate.”

Does the vertical path roller paper

sensor operate normally?

Replace the sensor or

the lever.

YES

Check the roller for

wear and deformation,

and the roll for attach-

ment.

11-76

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

2 Separation/Feeding Assembly

Cause

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Copy paper

Try paper recommended by Canon. Is

the problem corrected?

Is the copy paper curled, wavy, or

otherwise deformed?

Is there foreign matter in the feeding

assembly?

YES

Ask the user to use

recommended paper.

Replace the paper.

YES

Feeding

assembly

Instruct the user on the

correct method of

storing paper.

Feed belt,

Roller

Static elimi-

nator

Pre-registra-

tion roller

paper sensor

(Q751)

Is the feed belt rotating properly?

YES

Remove the foreign

matter.

Check the belt and the

roller.

Replace the sensor or

the lever.

Is the static eliminator soiled with

toner or the like?

Does the pre-registration roller paper

sensor operate normally?

Registration

roller

Is the registration roller worn, de-

formed, or soiled?

YES

Clean the static

eliminator.

If dirt is found, clean

with alcohol; if wear

or deformation is

found, replace it.

1. Check the spring

used to control

Registration-

spring,

registration.

Spring clutch

of registra-

tion assem-

bly

2. Check the spring

clutch of the regis-

tration assembly.

3 Fixing/Delivery Assembly

Cause

Inlet guide

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Clean the guide with

solvent.

Is the fixing inlet guide soiled with

toner?

YES

Fixing lower

roller, Fixing

film

Delivery

paper detect-

ing lever

Is the fixing lower roller or the fixing

film deformed or scratched?

YES

Replace the roller or

the fixing assembly

upper unit.

Make adjustments so

that it moves

Does the delivery detecting lever

move smoothly?

smoothly.

Delivery

sensor (PS3)

Delivery

roller drive

assembly

Leading

Does the delivery sensor operate

normally?

Does the delivery roller operate

smoothly?

Replace the sensor.

Check the delivery

roller drive assembly.

YES

Check the leading

edge of copy paper for

margin.

edge margin

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-77

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. Faulty Feeding

1 Double-Feeding

Cause

Cassette

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

Place the copy paper

properly.

Is the copy paper placed under the

claw properly?

Push down the copy paper inside the

cassette. Does it move up when let go

with its end coming under the claw?

1. Check the copy

paper width.

2. Check the position

of the side guide

plate of the cassette.

(universal cassette

only)

3. Measure the force

of the spring of the

cassette; if faulty,

replace the cassette

spring.

Is the sheets of paper placed in the

cassette uneven?

Is the paper of a type recommended by

Canon?

YES

Even out the sheets in

the cassette.

Ask the user to use

recommended paper.

Check the claw for

deformation.

Copy paper

Claw (cas-

sette)

YES

2 Wrinkles

Cause

Pickup

assembly,

Vertical path

roller,

Step

Checks

YES/NO

Action

• Check the pickup

assembly.

• Check the vertical

path roller.

Turn off the power while copy paper is

moving through the feeding assembly.

Is the copy paper wrinkled or found

askew?

YES

Registration

roller

• Check the registra-

tion roller.

Copy paper

Try fresh paper. Is the problem cor-

rected?

YES

The paper is moist.

Instruct the user on the

correct method of

storing paper.

Try paper of a type recommended by

Canon. Is the problem corrected?

Is the inlet guide soiled with toner?

YES

Ask the user to use

recommended paper.

Check the fixing

assembly.

Clean the inlet guide

with solvent.

Fixing

assembly

Inlet guide

YES

11-78

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

VI. ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF

ELECTRICAL PARTS

A. Sensors and Solenoids

SL3

PS2

SL4

SL1

SL2

PS5

SL5

PS4

PS1

Q751

PS3

Figure 11-601

Symbol

Name

Notation

Description

Remarks

Photointerrupters PS1

Scanner home position detection

Lens home position detection

Delivery assembly paper detection

Vertical path assembly paper

detection

PS2

PS3

PS4

PS5

Single-feeder paper detection

Single-feeder

type only

Q751

Pre-registration roller paper detec-

tion

Solenoid

SL1

Pickup clutch solenoid

Registration clutch solenoid

Lens solenoid

SL2

SL3

SL4

Multifeeder pickup solenoid

Multifeeder

type only

SL5

Cassette pickup solenoid

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-79

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. Switches

SW309

DS1

SW101

Figure 11-602

Symbol

Name

Switch

Notation

DS1

Description

Door switch

Remarks

SW309

Power switch

Switch

SW101

Density correction switch

11-80

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Lamp, Heater, Motor, Etc.

LA1

TH2

FU2

TH1

FU1

VZ2

VZ1

FM1

Figure 11-603

Symbol

Name

Lamp

Notation

LA1

Description

Scanning lamp

Remarks

Heater

Motor

Fixing heater

Main motor

Scanner/lens drive motor

Fan motor

FM1

Scanner cooling fan

Thermistor

Thermal fuse

Varistor

TH1

TH2

Fixing heater temperature detection

Scanner temperature detection

Lamp overheating detection

Fixing heater overheating detection

FU1

FU2

Fixing film varistor

Transfer guide varistor

VZ1

VZ2

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-81

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

D. PCBs

[9]

[8]

[3]

[5]

[4]

[2]

[1]

[6]

[7]

Figure 11-604

Ref.

[1]

[2]

Name

Noise filter PCB

DC controller PCB

Description

Removes noise from the power supply.

Controls sequence of operations.

Supplies DC power, generates high voltage, and

controls the scanning lamp.

[3]

Composite power supply PCB

[4]

High-voltage contact PCB

Makes an electrical connection between the machine

top and bottom.

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

Control panel PCB

Sensor PCB

AE sensor PCB

Blanking PCB (front)

Blanking PCB (rear)

Provides copying insurrections/indications.

Detects paper in front of the registration roller.

Detects the density of originals.

Used for blanking exposure.

11-82

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

E. ADF

[1]

PI3

PI2

MS1

PI1

Figure 11-605

Symbol

Name

Notation

Description

Remarks

Photointerrupter PI1

Delivery paper detection

PI2

PI3

Registration roller paper detection

Original placement detection

Microswitch

Motor

MS1

ADF open/close switch

Belt motor

Pickup motor

[1]

Controls sequence of operations

ADF controller

PCB

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-83

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

F. Variable Resistors (VR) and Check Pins by PCB

Of the variable resistors (VR) and check pins, those needed in the field are discussed herein.

Those not found in the discussions are for the factory only, requiring special tools and adjustment

to an extremely accuracy. Do not touch them in the field.

Caution:

VRs that may be used in the field ................

VRs that must not be used in the field .........

1. DC Controller PCB

JP102

JP101

VR104

J130

J102

J114

J111

VR106

J201

J101

J111

J131

CP23

GND

VR105

VR107

J109

J108

JP103

JP104

VR103

VR102

J107

J105

J106 J132 J113

J103

J104

SW101

1 1

2 1

5 1

4 1

8 1

Figure 11-606

2. Composite Power Supply PCB

J203

J204

J202

J207

J201

VR801

1 2

VR001

VR301

J910

J302

J209

FU102

J205

J213

J212

Figure 11-607

11-84

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

3. ADF Controller PCB

FACE

Soldered side

TP1

CB1

PSW SW1

SW2

Figure 11-608

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-85

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS

The microprocessor on the machine’s DC controller PCB is equipped with a self diagnostic

mechanism that checks the condition of the machine (particularly, sensors) and indicates an error

code in the count/ratio indicator on the control panel upon detection of a fault.

In the case of ‘E001’, ‘E0’ and ‘01’ are flashed alternately.

Code

Cause

Description

‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, or ‘E003’ has The power switch is turned off and then

occurred.

on immediately after an error (‘E000’,

‘E001’, ‘E002’, ‘E003’) has occurred.

• The temperature detected by the

thermistor (TH1) does not reach 65°C

1.5 sec after the Copy Start key has

been pressed.

• The thermistor (TH1) is faulty.

• The fixing heater (H1) is faulty.

• The thermal fuse (FU2) has blown.

• The DC controller PCB is faulty.

• The composite power supply PCB is • The temperature detected by the

faulty.

thermistor (TH1) does not reach 150°C

4 sec after the Copy Start key has been

pressed.

• The thermistor (TH1) is faulty.

• The DC controller PCB is faulty.

• The temperature detected by the

thermistor (TH1) exceeds 230°C.

• The composite power supply PCB is • The temperature detected by the

faulty.

thermistor (TH1) exceeds by 30°C or

more.

• The temperature detected by the

thermistor (TH1) registers an increase

of 100°C or more within 1 sec.

• The temperature detected by the

thermistor (TH1) registers an increase

of 40°C or more after it has reached

100°C during standby.

• E0 detection signal (E0_DT) is de-

tected twice or more in succession.

• The temperature detected by the

thermistor (TH1) has exeeded 150°C

during copy operation and maximum

power is applied for 10 to 14 sec

thereafter.

• The thermistor (TH1) is faulty.

• The fixing heater (H1) is faulty.

• The thermal fuse (FU2) has blown.

• The DC controller PCB is faulty.

• The composite power supply PCB is

faulty.

• The thermistor (TH1) is faulty.

• The fixing heater (H1) is faulty.

• The thermal fuse (FU2) has blown.

• The DC controller PCB is faulty.

• The composite power supply PCB is

faulty.

• The temperature detected by the

thermistor (TH1) drops to and remains

150°C or lower after it has reached

160°C.

11-86

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code

Cause

Description

• The main motor (M1) is fault.

• The DC controller PCB is faulty.

• The rotation of the main motor deviates

(indicated by MLOCK=0) for 1 sec or

more while the main motor drive signal

(MMD=1) is being generated.

• The composite power supply PCB is • The actual output value of the compos-

faulty.

ite power supply high voltage is differ-

ent from the setting value twice in

succession.

• The DC controller PCB is faulty.

( ) ^{• The scanner home position sensor}

• The scanner home position is not

detected within 10 sec after the scanner

has turned on.

• The scanner does not leave the home

position after it has turned on.

(PS1) is faulty.

• The scanner/lens drive motor (M2)

The keys on the

control panel

is faulty.

• The DC controller PCB is faulty.

are locked

without error

code indication.

• The lens home position sensor

(PS2) is faulty.

• The scanner/lens drive motor (M2)

is faulty.

• The lens cable is faulty.

• The DC controller PCB is faulty.

• The scanning lamp (LA1) is faulty.

• The DC controller PCB is faulty.

• The composite power supply PCB is

faulty.

• The lens hoe position is not detected

after the lens has moved the maximum

travel distance.

• The lens does not leave the home

position after it has turned on.

• The lamp ON detection signal is not

detected for 1 sec or more in the

presence of the scanning lamp On

signal.

• The lamp ON detection signal is

detected for 1 sec or more in the

absence of the scanning lamp ON

signal.

• The DC controller PCB is faulty.

• The composite power supply PCB is

faulty.

• The frequency of the power supply

is faulty.

• A fault in the communication between

DC controller PCB and composite

power supply PCB is detected.

• The interval between zero-cross signals

is in excess of the allowed interval.

• The composite power supply PCB is

faulty.

• Data communication between the

copier and the ADF (faulty).

• The communication with the copier is

interrupted for 5 sec or more; the

communication is monitored at all

times.

• The DC controller PCB is faulty.

• The composite power supply PCB is

faulty.

• During a copying run, the +24 V power

deviates from the control value by

±20%.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

11-87

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

Caution:

1. If the self-diagnosis has turned on, turn off the power switch to reset the machine.

In the case of ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, or ‘E003’, however, the machine must be reset as

follows: this consideration is to prevent feeding power to the fixing heater otherwise oc-

curring if the thermistor has an open circuit:

2. In the case of ‘E0’, ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, ‘E003’, or ‘E220’, the machine will turn off in

1.5 sec for ‘E0’ and ‘E000’ through ‘E003’ and in 2 sec for ‘E220’.

3. In the case of ‘E0’, ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, or ‘E003’, perform the following steps:

1) Turn off the power switch, and short circuit JP101 and JP102 on the DC controller PCB

with a screwdriver or the like.

JP102

JP101

Figure 11-701

2) While keeping the condition in step 1), turn on the power switch.

3) Stop short-circuiting JP101 and JP102.

11-88

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

APPENDIX

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ........ A-1

B. SIGNALS AND

ABBREVIATIONS ....................... A-3

C. GENERAL CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ................................... A-5

D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ................................... A-7

E. ADF CONTROLLER CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ................................. A-15

F. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................. A-19

G. CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ................................. A-27

H. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT

I. SENSOR CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ................................. A-30

J. NOISE FILTER CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ................................. A-31

K. HIGH VOLTAGE CONTACT

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................. A-32

L. BLANK EXPOSURE (front)

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................. A-33

M. BLANK EXPOSURE (rear)

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................. A-34

N. SPECIAL TOOLS ...................... A-35

O. SOLVENTS/OILS ...................... A-36

DIAGRAM ................................. A-29

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

(A4, 2 copies, DIRECT, from cassette)

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART

1. COPYBOARD TYPE

Power switch

Copy Start key

Sequence

STBY

INTR

AER

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

LSTR

STBY

Main motor (M1)

Scanner / lens drive

motor (M2)

Scanner home position

sensor (PS1)

Lens home position

sensor (PS2)

Lens solenoid (SL3)

Pickup clutch solenoid

(SL1)

Cassette pickup

solenoid (SL5)

Vertical path roller

paper sensor (PS4)

Registration clutch

solenoid (SL2)

Pre-registration roller

paper sensor (Q751)

Scanning lamp (LA1)

Primary AC bias

Primary DC bias

Developing AC bias

Developing DC bias

Transfer bias

Static eliminator bias

Fixing heater (H1)

Scanner cooling fan

(FM1)

Delivery sensor (PS3)

: Scanner / lens drive motor (reverse)

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-1

Power switch

Copy Start key

2. ADF TYPE

(A4, 2 copies, DIRECT, from cassette)

Original set

SCFW

SCRV

LSTR

STBY

Sequence

STBY

INTR

ORGST

SCFW

SCRV

ORGST

Preparing for

pickup

Pickup motor (M2)

Belt motor (M1)

Original detection

sensor (PI3)

ADF

Registration paper

sensor (PI2)

Delivery sensor (PI1)

Main motor (M1)

Scanner / lens drive

motor (M2)

Scanner home position

sensor (PS1)

Lens home position

sensor (PS2)

Lens solenoid (SL3)

Pickup clutch solenoid

(SL1)

Cassette pickup solenoid

(SL5)

Vertical path roller

paper sensor (PS4)

Registration clutch

solenoid (SL2)

Pre-registration roller

paper sensor (Q751)

Copier

Scanning lamp (LA1)

12 Primary AC bias

Primary DC bias

Developing AC bias

15 Developing DC bias

Transfer bias

17 Static eliminator bias

18 Fixing heater (H1)

Scanner cooling fan

(FM1)

Delivery sensor (PS3)

: Scanner / lens drive motor (reverse) / Pickup motor (reverse) / Belt motor (reverse)

A-2

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS

What follows below is a list of signals and abbreviations used in the chapters of the manual and circuit diagrams.

The abbreviations within parentheses represent analog signals, which cannot be expressed in terms of ‘1’ or ‘0’.

T_FW_ON

T_FW_S

T_REV_ON

TH1

TRANSFER DC BIAS ON signal

1. Signals

ACBIAS

[AE]

AEREF

BIAS_PWM

BIAS_S

CLK32K

CPUSD

DPD

DV_AC_ON

DV_DC_ON

E0_DT

TRANSFER CURRENT DETECTION signal

TRANSFER POSITIVE DC BIAS ON signal

FIXING THERMISTOR signal

AC BIAS OSCILLATION signal

AE SENSOR OUTPUT signal

AE SENSOR REFERENCE signal

DC BIAS CONTROL signal

TH2

SCANNER THERMISTOR signal

DC BIAS MONITOR signal

2. Abbreviations

AER

INTR

LSTR

SCFW

SCRV

STBY

TRANSFORMER CONTROL signal

CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID DRIVE signal

DELIVERY PAPER DETECTION signal

DEVELOPING AC BIAS ON signal

DEVELOPING DC BIAS ON signal

E0 DETECTION signal

SCANNER COOLING FAN DRIVE signal

FIXING HEATER ERROR signal

FIXING HEATER OFF signal

FIXING HEATER DUTY signal

FIXING HEATER DRIVE signal

LAMP ACTIVATION DETECTION signal

SCANNING LAMP ACTIVATION signal

LENS HOME POSITION signal

AE (MEASUREMENT) ROTATION

INITIAL ROTATION

LAST ROTATION

SCANNER FORWARD

SCANNER REVERSE

STANDBY

FM1D

HEAT_ERR

HEAT_OFF

HEAT_PWM

HEAT_TRG

LAMP_DETECT

LAMP_ON

LHP

LNSLD

MFSLD

MLOCK

MMCLK

MMD

LENS SOLENOID DRIVE signal

MULTIFEEDER PICKUP SOLENOID DRIVE signal

MAIN MOTOR CONSTANT SPEED signal

MAIN MOTOR CLOCK PULSE signal

MAIN MOTOR DRIVE signal

PAC_OUT

PAC_S

PDC_PWM

PDC_S

PRIMARY CORONA AC BIAS signal

PRIMARY CORONA AC DETECTION signal

DC BIAS CONTROL signal

DC VOLTAGE MONITOR signal

PDP

PR_DC_ON

PUSLD

PWM_1KHz

PWOFF

VERTICAL PATH ROLLER PAPER DETECTION signal

PRIMARY CHARGING DC BIAS ON signal

PICKUP CLUTCH SOLENOID DRIVE signal

SCANNING LAMP INTENSITY ADJUSTMENT signal

POWER SWITCH OFF signal

RGSLD

RLOFF

REGISTRATION CLUTCH SOLENOID DRIVE signal

RELAY DRIVE signal

RPD

SB_LP

SC_A

SC_B

SC_COM

SCHP

SFPD

T_FEEDBACK

T_FW_DRV

PRE-REGISTRATION ROLLER PAPER DETECTION signal

SIDE BLANK EXPOSURE LAMP ON signal

SCANNER MOTOR PULSE signal A

SCANNER MOTOR PULSE signal B

SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE signal

SCANNER HOME POSITION signal

SINGLE-FEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal

TRANSFER BIAS VOLTAGE DETECTION signal

TRANSFER DC BIAS CONTROL signal

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-3

A-4

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Fixing heater

1. Copier

MAIN MOTOR DRIVER PCB

J16

J901

Scanning lamp

LA1

Thermal fuse 1

FU1

[220/240V]

Main motor

Line filter

LF1

J502

J501

FT2

FT1

FT4

FT3

J17

FT6

J434

J15

DS1

Door switch

NF1

FT5

FU2

BP701

BP703

BP705

BP707

BP706

NOISE FILTER PCB

Thermal fuse 2

J910

J207

J205

[120V]

JP502

J501

FT2

FT1

FT4

FT3

J501F

J209

J212

J213

T302

JP501

J201

BP702

J14

DS1

Door switch

COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY PCB

NF1

J11

J12

BP704

NOISE FILTER PCB

VZ2

Varistor 2

HVT BOARD 2

J15

HVT BOARD 1

AE SENSOR PCB

Scanner home

position sensor

PS1

J13

J202

J203

J204

5 6 7

Scanner

cooling fan

FM1

Fixing thermistor

TH1

Scanner

thermistor

TH2

J601

J62

J433

J301

J601

To ADF

Delivery sensor

PS3

J24F

J61

7 8 9

J107

J101

J131

J130

J105

J103

J104

J102

DC CONTROLLER PCB

J109

J113

J132

J114

4 5

J108

J110

J111

J106

10 11

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

J52

J51

J58

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

J301

J60

J751

J601

J602

To ADF

J53

J54

J55

Scanner/lens

drive motor

Q751

Pre-registration roller

paper sensor

J302

J303

SIDE BLANK EXPOSURE PCB

CONTROL PANEL PCB

J56

J57

J59

Power switch

SL1

Pickup clutch

solenoid

SENSOR PCB

VZ1

Varistor 1

SL3

Lens

solenoid

SL2

Registration

clutch solenoid pickup solenoid position sensor paper sensor

SL4

Multifeeder

PS2

PS5

SL5

Cassette

pickup solenoid

PS4

Fixing film

Vertical path roller

paper sensor

Lens home

Single-feeder

(Multifeeder

type only)

(Single-feeder

type only)

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-5

2. ADF

Delivery

sensor

Registration

sensor

Original placement

sensor

3 2 1

J201

J202

J203

1 2 3 4 5 6

6 5 4 3 2 1

J105

Pickup motor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Belt motor

ADF CONTROLLER PCB

GNDL

RxD

GNDL

TxD

To DC controller

GND^L

ACK

GND^L

REQ

4 3 2 1

Color coding

2 1

BK BLACK

BL BLUE

BR BROWN

GY GRAY

GN GREEN

OR ORANGE

PK PINK

GNDL

+5V

To composite power supply

GND^D

+24V

RED

COM

MS1

SB SKY-BLUE

VIOLET

WHITE

YELLOW

Y/GN

ADF

Switch

(M3)

(M4)

A-6

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

DC Controller Circuit Diagram (1/8)

ZER_CRS_LEVEL

E0_BUCK

FM1D

D_L_1

RG_PD_CPU

R370

D_L_2

LS_HP_CPU

ZER_CRS_EDGE

R372

R373

R374

AD<7..0>

+5V

MFSLD

C191

R106

R105

NF101

Vcc

MD2

MD1

MD0

P66

HEAT_PWM

PU_SL

PB0

PB1

PB2

PB3

PB4

PB5

PB6

PB7

RESO*

Vss

R369

SC_I_SEL1

S_OUT

R368

SC_HP_CPU

RETRY_PD_CPU

HEAT_ERR_CPU*

P65

SC_INA

SC_INA*

SC_INB

SC_INB*

P64

Q102

P63

Vcc

+5V

R270

XTAL

EXTAL

Vss

C192

X101

+5V

R104

C103

C102

Q105

P90

P91

P92

P93

P94

P95

P40

P41

P42

P43

Vss

NMI

R102

Q101

OUT VCC

GND

RES*

STBY*

PHAI

P62

+5V

C105

S_IN

R103

+5V

M1_LOCK_CPU

R101

C202

C218

C101

CPS_ACK_CPU*

E0_DT

P61

+5V

LNSLD

PUSLD

RGSLD

P60

Vss

REQ*

P53

SC_I_SEL3

SC_I_SEL2

STBY/CPY

HEAT_OFF

S_CLK

REQ

Q103

P52

+5V

P51

Q104

P44

P45

P46

P50

P27

R269

Q157

R302

POWER_OFF*

P26

COMP_CLR

REQ*

Q152

+5V

C104

R299

M1_ON*

SB_ON

R218

D202

Q182

R219

ACK

TXD

DIGIT<4..0>

DV_AC_ON*

C162

D201

+5V

DV_DC_ON*

PR_DC_ON*

CPS_REQ*

R301

Q149

5 6 7

SEG<7..0>

KEY<7..0>

C193

+5V

R300

R211

D203

Q183

R210

RXD

C157

D200

ADF type only

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-7

DC Controller Circuit DIagram (2/8)

+5V

R115

SC_I_SEL3

R277

Q165

Q112

R114

R117

R267

SC_I_SEL1

SC_I_SEL2

R113

R112

Q109

Q155

+24VU

R399

SC_COM

SC_B

SC_B*

SC_A

SC_A*

+5V

C107

C106

C166 C165 C164 C163

R227

R226

R225

R224

SC_INB*

SC_INB

SC_INA*

SC_INA

C263

C264

C265

C266

+5V

R111

R109

R107

R108

C109

C108

A-8

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

DC Controller Circuit Diagram (3/8)

VR103

R121

C155

+24VR

R265

+5V

+24VR

C111

R119

R120

+5V

R266

R206

AE_DATA

Q106

AEREF

Q106

C185

ZD101

VR102

R118

C184

R264

C186

R263

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-9

DC Controller Circuit Diagram (4/8)

KEY<7..0>

KR0

KR1

KR2

KR3

KR4

KR5

KR6

KR7

R134

R133

R132

R131

R130

R129

R128

R127

HEAT0

HEAT1

SERVICE

SFPD

D102

D113

D218

D109

DPD

D108

CDP

D106

KR6

DIG0

DIG1

[CPM0]

[CPM1]

D115

10CPM 12/13CPM

KR6

D114

DIGIT<4..0>

+5V

R236

R239

R238

R237

R362

KR2

KR5

DIG3

DIG0

AB/inch

inch

D103

Q121

R138

R137

R136

R135

R360

[SIZE0]

[SIZE1]

D103

D190

DIG0

DIG1

DIG2

DIG3

DIG4

D190

+5V

Q124

+5V

120V 220/240V

KR3

DIG4

[VOL1]

D214

Q123

+5V

Q122

+5V

Q202

SEG<7..0>

SEG0*

SEG1*

SEG2*

SEG3*

SEG4*

SEG5*

SEG6*

SEG7*

Q113

Q114

Q115

Q116

Q117

Q118

Q119

Q120

R240 R243 R242 R241 R358

A-10

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

DC Controller Circuit Diagram (5/8)

+5V

R278

+24VU

Q126

RGAD_VR

LS_VR

VR104

VR106

E0_BUCK

CP23

D118

Q125

R294

R292

CPGND1

R140

+5V

R145

E0_DT

JP101

JP102

R279

R139

C123

BL_VR

OP_VR

VR105

VR107

R293

R382

R271

ZER_CRS_LEVEL

+5V

R144

+5V

Q153

VDD

+5V

R158

D_L_2

R150

IN B

IN A

ZER_CRS_EDGE

ZER_CRS

R154

C167

SW101

(AB/inch type only)

Q107

R149

D183

C181

VSS OUT X

Q131

D_L_1

C126

R275

C183

R143

R148

+5V

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-11

DC Controller Circuit Diagram (6/8)

+24VU

+5V

D124

R361

R181

R173

M_TH

LNSLD*

PUSLD*

RGSLD*

MFSLD*

FM1D*

R165

R162

R161

R166

R352

R353

R160

LNSLD

PUSLD

RGSLD

MFSLD

FM1D

Q145

Q144

Q143

Q142

Q200

Q201

Q133

TH1

TH2

R174

R175

R176

R177

R207

R178

R179

D127

AE_DATA

DSVR

D126

OP_VR

LS_VR

RGAD_VR

BL_VR

D125

AD<7..0>

C134 C135 C154 C136 C137 C138 C139 C133

D211

CPUSD*

SB_LP*

CPUSD

SB_ON

+5V

R163

R250 R246 R245 R244

CPS_ACK_CPU*

M1_LOCK_CPU*

HEAT_ERR_CPU*

LS_HP_CPU

R182

R183

R172

R171

ACK*

MLOCK

HEAT_ERR*

LHP

+5V

Q137

M1_ON*

C127

C250

C128

C132

C141

C140

MMD

R164

SC_HP_CPU

R169

R356

SCHP

PDP

RETRY_PD_CPU

C129

CPS_REQ

PR_DC_ON

DV_DC_ON

DV_AC_ON

STBY/CPY*

CPS_REQ*

PR_DC_ON*

DV_DC_ON*

DV_AC_ON*

STBY/CPY

Q134

Q136

Q135

Q138

Q140

RG_PD_CPU

R170

RPD

R249

A-12

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

DC Controller Circuit Diagram (7/8)

+5V

R196

POWER_OFF*

HEAT_ERR*

COMP_CLR

R189

RLOFF*

C143

D184

–

Q146

Q107

+5V

Q158

R188

C142

R193

R191

D128

R192

D185

+5V

C176

M_TH

–

HEAT_TRG

Q148

Q147

+5V

Q108

R190

+5V

R186

Q151

R212

R214

C160

HEAT_OFF

Q160

C161

D132

R187

HEAT_PWM

+5V

D133

–

Q108

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-13

DC Controller Circuit Diagram (8/8)

+24VR

+24VU

+5V

count1

count2

J105

+5V

R363

R200

R385

+24VU

J101

J105

LNSLD*

J109

SCHP

PUSLD*

RGSLD*

MFSLD*

TH1

J102

C146

C151

C149

C150

DIG1

C145

C152

C147 C201

C148

HEAT0

DIG1

C268

HEAT1

+5V

LHP

C259

C260

C261

C253

R197

R364

R388

DIG3

DPD

J102

SC_COM

SC_B*

SC_B

J110

+24VU

J102

REQ

ACK

TXD

RXD

J114

J130

SC_A*

SC_A

FM1D*

C254

J130

R216

R367

R389

C255

DIG2

J113

DIG0

J111

J113

DIG1

TH2

SFPD

J131

DIG2

DIG3

ADF type only

SEG0*

SEG1*

SEG2*

SEG3*

SEG4*

SEG5*

SEG6*

SEG7*

STBY/CPY*

DV_AC_ON

DV_DC_ON

PR_DC_ON

CPS_REQ

MMD

J103

CDP

J108

+24VR

DIG3

RPD

ACK*

J107

RLOFF*

+5V

AEREF

C267

J108

C203 C205 C204 C210 C209 C208 C207 C206

MLOCK

HEAT_TRG

ZER_CRS

S_CLK

J104

KR0

J111

KR1

S_OUT

PWOFF

S_IN

DIG2

SERVICE

SB_LP*

PWOFF

C258

C257

C262

JP103

JP104

J106

+5V

+24VU

J111

FB101

C251

FB102

C252

CPUSD*

J132

DSVR

DIG4

C256

J111

+24VU

+5V

KR5

DIG2

KR4

DIG3

KR6

KR7

TP102

J201

TP103

+5V

R351

R386

TP101

J132

R365

PDP

A-14

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

E. ADF CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

ADF Controller Circuit Diagram (1/3)

+5V

RESET*

RESET

+5V

Vref

GND

Vcc

+5V

XTAL

P10/A0

P11/A1

P12/A2

P13/A3

P14/A4

P15/A5

P16/A6

P17/A7

Vss

VPP

A12

VCC

A14

A13

A12

A14

A13

EXTAL

MD1

MD0

JP1

NMI*

A11

+5V

Vcc

A11

OE*

A10

CE*

STBY*

A10

A15

Vss

P40/TMCI0

P41/TMO0

P42/TMRI0

P43/TMCI1

P44/TMO1

P45/TMRI1

P46/PHI

P47/E

P20/A8

P21/A9

P22/A10

P23/A11

P24/A12

P25/A13

P26/A14

GND

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

ACK

REQ

A15

RD*

+5V

C22

+5V

CP1

R45

HC14

Q11

+24V

ADFC

C10

ZD1

VCC

GND

CB1

C21

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-15

ADF Controller Circuit Diagram (2/3)

TP1

+24V

TP1

DM0

DM1

TP1

VCC NC

TP1

MA*

MB*

OUTA

IN1

IN2

OUT1

OUT2

OUTA*

+5V

R10

TP1

GND

OUTA*

VrefA

INA*

TdA

GND

INA

+5V

C11

C13

R12

+24V

VSA

OUTA

RSB

RSA

OUTB*

TdB

C14

VSS

+24V

+5V

R16

R14

VrefB

INB*

GND

INB

OUTB

R15

+5V

R11

LED

C12

R13

A-16

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

ADF Controller Circuit Diagram (3/3)

+5V

R19

R21

R23

R41

R42

R43

PDP3

PDP2

PDP1

R29

HC14

C16

C17

C18

R31

R30

REQ

ACK

R20

R22

R24

C19

+5V

R32

ACK

RXD

TP1

R33

HC14

R35

R34

TXD

RXD

C20

+5V

R36

Q10

TP1

TXD

+5V

R37

R38

DIPSW1

DIPSW0

HC14

+5V

HC14

+5V

SW1

R39

DIGIT0

DIGIT1

DIGIT2

DIGIT3

HC14

PSW

SW3

HC14

SW2

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-17

A-18

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

F. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A502] (1/8)

J201

AC_H

AC_H_AF

<A503>

RL601

D603

AC_INPUT

<A503>

AC_N_AF

AC_N

R606

R607

Q607

+5V

D602

R601

FIX_HT_H

D604

Q614

C603

<A504>

VIN_1SR139

+5V

D601

J207

T600

IN OUT

GND

Q605

D606

C613

C609

R600

FIX_HT_N

C601

<A508>

5V_ON*

Q615

+5V

D605

R616

R620

<A508>

ZER_CRS

Q616

R622

RLOFF*

<A508>

Q617

D810

C605

R801

<A508>

AC_MONITOR

C818

AC1

<A509>

+5V

Q611

R603

Q608

C620

R609

Q621

R614

HEAT_TRG

<A508>

R611

R615

Q620

R602

C604

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-19

Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A503] (2/8)

<A502>

AC_H_AF

TH102

Q105

C101

FU102

FB104

To radiator plate

D543

D542

R644

TH101

+5V

T101

AC_N_AF

<A502>

24VOFF <A504>

24VON <A504>

LOW_GU <A504>

LOW_G <A504>

R104

C588

R116

MPWM

<A508>

Q113

R105

R106

HV_H <A506>

HV_L <A506>

<A509>

AC_HA

D111

R184

MPWM_INV

<A504>

D106

MV_H <A505>

MV_L <A505>

<A509>

AC_LA

<NC=8>

R109

R103

D121

D122

D124

D125

R110

R108

D123

Q118

T103

T104

PROTECT

<A508>

A-20

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A504] (3/8)

J202

R182

Q180

+5V

L180

+24VR

L181

R181

V+

+5V

T101

C182

C181

GND

INV

D132

<A508>

TIM

C183

D103

R118

C115

DC24V_S

<A508>

+5V

C180

+5V

C116

R129

R119

C141

D117

C137

R124

+24VR

D118

R122

<A503>

24VOFF

+5V

ZD103

+5V

R158

FB101

D104

D129

R115

ZD102

R123

Q117

R154

C152

R157

ZD101

+5V

Q108

D130

C132

C118

Q117

R127

C135

R139

C134

+5V

C136

C133

R121

LOW_G

<A503>

O.C.P.1

CLIMIT

<A508>

D105

VIN_1SR139

<A502>

+24VU

FB103

L101

Q109

24VON

<A503>

+24VR

R131

+5V

R167

C153

+5V

R138

C154

+5V

R165

D109

R128

R132

T105

D107

C122

R144

R149

R168

C142

R151

LOW_GU

<A503>

FB102

Q110

Q116

R153

C160

R145

Q116

R130

C125

Q115

D131

Q111

R169

C140

C129

C139

C103

C127

+5V

R125

R186

R185

D119

C143

R136

MPWM_INV

<A508>

R148

+24VR

R156

D120

R147

Q115

C145

+5V

Q107

R160

C146

R155

R146

C144

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-21

Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A505] (4/8)

R209

R203

R205

<A503>

MV_H

D202

R202

C201

R206

<A508>

PDC_S

C204

C206

R201

MV_L

<A503>

T101

C202

JP202

R211

PDC_PWM

<A508>

Q201

C207

JP148

R212

C539

C538

C513

+24VR

C561

R550

T508

R591

<A508>

PAC_OUT

R516

PRIMARY

J209

JP140

R521

+24VR

C510

C512

R514

Q526

C509

C611

A-22

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A506] (5/8)

J215

J212

DEVELOPING

D211

R225

C210

C212

C214

J213

SEPARATION

R254

C211

C213

T101

<A503>

HV_H

R210

C220

R236

T201

C221

R238

R237

ACBIAS

<A508>

HV_L

<A503>

+5V

R207

BIAS_PWM

<A508>

D214

R208

Q206

R239

C219

C218

C208

R243

BIAS_S

<A508>

D215

C215

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-23

Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A507] (6/8)

R361

C377

R327

VR301

D306

T_FEEDBACK

<A508>

C359

R318

+24VR

T302

J210

Transfer output

R336

Q310

T_FW_DRV

<A508>

D308

+24VR

Q308

C318

D307

R332

T_FW_ON

<A508>

R390

CLK32K

<A508>

Q325

HV_LIMIT

<A508>

ZD303

C317

R392

Q311

R393

R326

<A508>

T_FW_S

C342

C322

C379

C381

<A503>

HV_H

T101

JP301

C346

C345

D323

D325

R351

R352 R353

R354 R355 R356

T_REV

C343

C344

C321

C380

C382

D326

HV_L

<A503>

+5V

T_REV_R

R388

T_REV_ON*

<A508>

Q321

A-24

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A508] (7/8)

J205

+24VU

GND

MMD

MLOCK

J203

<A505> PAC_S

+5V

PAC_S

PAC_OUT

5V_ON*

<A505>

<A502>

+5FBT

5V_ON*

RLOFF*

ACK*

<A502>

Q901

HV_LIMIT

RESET

HV_LIMIT

PW_OFF*

PWOFF

IN OUT

GND

MMD

+5V

RESET*

MODE1

CPS_REQ*

DATA1

CPS_REQ

PR_DC_ON

DV_DC_ON

DV_AC_ON

STBY/CPY*

JP999

CPS_REQ

C903

MODE2

DATA2

PR_DC_ON

J_CTL

DATA3

DATA0

T_FW_ON

ACK*

DV_DC_ON

DV_AC_ON

STBY/CPY*

<A509> LAMP_ON

VR801

R802

<A509> PWM_1KHz

+5V

FL_LIGHT_ON*

AC_MONI_VR

AC_MONI TOR

AGND

LAMP_DETECT <A509>

T_FW_ON

ACK*

<A507>

CLK32K

PGND

<A502> AC_MONITOR

CLK32K

<A507>

FL_S

P_C_S

+5V

+24V

+24VR

DC24V_S

T_FEEDBACK

BIAS_S

DC24V_S

T_FEEDBACK

BIAS_S

MPWM_CLK

MPWM

<A504>

<A507>

<A506>

<A505>

<A504>

<A503>

<A504>

<A507>

+5V

J204

MPWM

PDC_PWM

<A503>

<A505>

PDC_PWM

PWOFF

S_IN

PDC_S

BIAS_PWM

+24V

PDC_S

BIAS_PWM <A506>

+24VR

S_OUT

CLIMIT

S_CLK

PROTECT

TIM

ACBIAS

SKGND

S_IN

PROTECT

TIM

ACBIAS

SKGND

S_IN

<A506>

ZER_CRS <A502>

T_REV_ON*

T_FW_DRV

T_FW_S

T_REV_ON*

T_FW_DRV

T_FW_S

HEAT_TRG <A502>

MLOCK

S_OUT

S_CLK

S_OUT

S_CLK

Q900

JP999 : 220 / 240V model only

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-25

Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A509] (8/8)

R027

R006

R008

R018

R012

R013

R020

R021

LAMP_ON

<A508>

C003

Q003

PWM_1KHz

<A508>

Q005

R030

R028 R026 R003 VR001 R007 R023

D005

D006

C002

ZD001

R029

D004

D007

R022

+5V

<502>

AC_HA

HIC001

C004

R002

J910

C008

D002

AC_LA

<502>

Q002

Q0001

R016

R025

D010

D009

L001

R001

Q001

LAMP_DETECT

<A508>

D011

D008

Q011

C005

R012, R013, R018, R021 : 220 / 240V model only

A-26

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

G. CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

SW301

–

SW302

CLR

SW303

ZOOM

SW304

PRESET COPY RATIO

KR0

KR1

J301

SW305

SW306

COPY

SW307

SW308

CASSETTE/MULTI

C303

7 SEG DISPLAY

LED315

DIG0

DIG1

DIG2

DIG3

DIG4

J301

LED301

LED302

LED303

LED304

LED305

LED306

LED307

LED308

LED310

LED311

LED312

LED317

LED316

JAM

ZOOM

CASSETTE

MULTI

DFJAM

MAIN_JAM

ADF type only

ADF type

only

R301

R302

R303

R304

R305

R306

R307

R308

SEG0

SEG1

SEG2

SEG3

SEG4

SEG5

SEG6

SEG7

J301

+5V

C302

J301

C301

J301

VR301

DSVR

+5V

J301

SW309

PWOFF

J303

J301

J302

POWER

J303

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-27

APPENDIX

H. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

+24VR

R601

R603

J601-1

J601-2

C603

R606

C601

+24VR

R605

PD601

Q601

R602

+24VR

Q601

J601-3

J601-4

R604

C602

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-29

APPENDIX

I. SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

+5V

J751-2

J751-3

J751-1

Q751

RPD

GND

R751

A-30

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

APPENDIX

J. NOISE FILTER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

FU501

L501

AC_H

AC_N

JP502

JP501

J501-1

J501-2

C503

C504

R501

C501

C502

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-31

APPENDIX

K. HIGH VOLTAGE CONTACT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

JP701

BP701

BP702

BP703

BP704

JP702

JP703

R704

JP704

JP705

JP706

JP707

R701

JP708

JP709

R702

[PR_IN]

[GND_IN]

[DV_IN]

BP705

BP706

BP707

JP710

JP711

JP712

JP713

R703

JP714

A-32

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

APPENDIX

L. BLANK EXPOSURE (front) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

LA601

J601

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-33

APPENDIX

M. BLANK EXPOSURE (rear) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

LA602

J602

A-34

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

APPENDIX

N. SPECIAL TOOLS

You will need the following special tool(s) in addition to the standard tools set when servicing

the machine.

Tool

Tool No.

Shape

Rank*

Remarks

Mirror position-

ing tool (pair for

front and rear)

FY9-3009

For adjusting the dis-

tance between the No.1

and No.2 mirrors.

Wire clip

FY9-3017

CK-0054

For fixing the scanner

wire in place while ad-

justing its tension.

Spring gauge

For checking the cas-

sette spring pressure

Range of measure-

ments: 0 to 1,500g

*Rank:

A: Each service person is expected to carry one.

B: Each five or so service persons is expected to carry one.

C: Each workshop is expected to carry one.

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-35

APPENDIX

O. SOLVENTS/OILS

No.

Name

Alcohol

Uses

Composition

Hydrocarbon (fluorine family)

Alcohol

Remarks

• Do not bring near

fire.

• Procure locally.

• Isopropyl alcohol

may be substituted.

• Do not bring near

fire.

Cleaning: e.g.,

glass, plastic,

rubber parts;

external covers

Surface active agent

Solvent

Cleaning: e.g.,

metal; oil or

toner dirt

Lubricating

spring clutch

Lubricating

drive and

Hydrocarbon

(fluorine/chlorine family)

Alcohol

Mineral oil

(paraffin family)

Silicone oil

• Procure locally.

• CK-0451 (100cc)

Lubricating oil

• CK-0551 (20g)

friction parts,

scanner rail

A-36

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Prepared by

Office Imaging ProductsTechnical Support Division

CANON INC.

Printed in Japan

REVISION 0 (AUG. 1999) (30359/10317)

5-1, Hakusan 7-chome,Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan

1999 CANON INC.

CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

This pubication is printed on

70% reprocessed paper.

PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

0899AB2.135-1

Acer Camcorder SV 200 User Manual
Bose SoundDock SDOCK10BT User Manual
Canon Camcorder LEGRIA HMF306 User Manual
Casio EXILIM EX Z27 User Manual
EverFocus DVR EDR810H User Manual
Grindmaster CRATHCO 5311 User Manual
HP (Hewlett Packard) T450 User Manual
IDEAL INDUSTRIES Concord H CXSi 160 User Manual
JVC DPT 115 User Manual
JVC GR AX727 User Manual